Heteroaromatic compounds and their use as dopamine d1 ligands

ABSTRACT

The present invention provides, in part, compounds of Formula I: 
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
     and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof and N-oxides of the foregoing; processes for the preparation of; intermediates used in the preparation of; and compositions containing such compounds, salts or N-oxides, and their uses for treating D1-mediated (or D1-associated) disorders including, e.g., schizophrenia (e.g., its cognitive and negative symptoms), cognitive impairment (e.g., cognitive impairment associated with schizophrenia, AD, PD, or pharmacotherapy therapy), ADHD, impulsivity, compulsive gambling, overeating, autism spectrum disorder, MCI, age-related cognitive decline, dementia, RLS, Parkinson&#39;s disease, Huntington&#39;s chorea, anxiety, depression, MDD, TRD, and bipolar disorder.

This application claims the benefit of priority to U.S. provisionalpatent application Ser. No. 61/723,995 filed Nov. 8, 2012, thedisclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present invention generally relates to heteroaromatic compounds,which are dopamine D1 ligands, for example dopamine D1 agonists orpartial agonists.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Dopamine acts upon neurons through two families of dopamine receptors,D1-like receptors (D1Rs) and D2-like receptors (D2Rs). The D1-likereceptor family consists of D1 and D5 receptors which are expressed inmany regions of the brain. D1 mRNA has been found, for example, in thestriatum and nucleus accumbens. See e.g., Missale C, Nash S R, RobinsonS W, Jaber M, Caron M G “Dopamine receptors: from structure tofunction”, Physiological Reviews 78:189-225 (1998). Pharmacologicalstudies have reported that D1 and D5 receptors (D1/D5), namely D1-likereceptors, are linked to stimulation of adenylyl cyclase, whereas D2,D3, and D4 receptors, namely D2-like receptors, are linked to inhibitionof cAMP production.

Dopamine D1 receptors are implicated in numerous neuropharmacologicaland neurobiological functions. For example, D1 receptors are involved indifferent types of memory function and synaptic plasticity. See e.g.,Goldman-Rakic P S et al., “Targeting the dopamine D1 receptor inschizophrenia: insights for cognitive dysfunction”, Psychopharmacology174(1):3-16 (2004). Moreover, D1 receptors have been implicated in avariety of psychiatric, neurological, neurodevelopmental,neurodegenerative, mood, motivational, metabolic, cardiovascular, renal,ophthalmic, endocrine, and/or other disorders described herein includingschizophrenia (e.g., cognitive and negative symptoms in schizophrenia),cognitive impairment associated with D2 antagonist therapy, ADHD,impulsivity, autism spectrum disorder, mild cognitive impairment (MCI),age-related cognitive decline, Alzheimer's dementia, Parkinson's disease(PD), Huntington's chorea, depression, anxiety, treatment-resistantdepression (TRD), bipolar disorder, chronic apathy, anhedonia, chronicfatigue, post-traumatic stress disorder, seasonal affective disorder,social anxiety disorder, post-partum depression, serotonin syndrome,substance abuse and drug dependence, Tourette's syndrome, tardivedyskinesia, drowsiness, sexual dysfunction, migraine, systemic lupuserythematosus (SLE), hyperglycemia, dislipidemia, obesity, diabetes,sepsis, post-ischemic tubular necrosis, renal failure, resistant edema,narcolepsy, hypertension, congestive heart failure, postoperative ocularhypotonia, sleep disorders, pain, and other disorders in a mammal. Seee.g., Goulet M, Madras B K “D(1) dopamine receptor agonists are moreeffective in alleviating advanced than mild parkinsonism in1-methyl-4-phenyl-1,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridine-treated monkeys”, Journalof Pharmacology and Experimental Therapy 292(2):714-24 (2000); SurmeierD J et al., “The role of dopamine in modulating the structure andfunction of striatal circuits”, Prog. Brain Res. 183:149-67 (2010).

New or improved agents that modulate (such as agonize or partiallyagonize) D1 are needed for developing new and more effectivepharmaceuticals to treat diseases or conditions associated withdysregulated activation of D1, such as those described herein.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention provides, in part, a compound of Formula I:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:

X¹ is N or CT⁴;

Q¹ is an N-containing 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl or an N-containing 5-to 6-membered heterocycloalkyl, each optionally substituted with one R⁹and further optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 R¹⁰;

each of T¹, T², T³, and T⁴ is independently selected from the groupconsisting of H, halogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, cyclopropyl,fluorocyclopropyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, and —C(═O)—O—(C₁₋₄alkyl);

each of R¹ and R² is independently selected from the group consisting ofH, halogen, —CN, C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆ haloalkyl, C₁₋₆ alkoxy, C₁₋₆haloalkoxy, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, —C(═O)OH, and —C(═O)—O—(C₁₋₄ alkyl),wherein each of said C₁₋₆ alkyl and C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl is optionallysubstituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents each independentlyselected from halo, —OH, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy,and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy;

each of R³ and R⁴ is independently selected from the group consisting ofH, halogen, —OH, —NO₂, —CN, —SF₅, C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆ haloalkyl, C₁₋₆haloalkoxy, C₂₋₆ alkenyl, C₂₋₆ alkynyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, a 4- to10-membered heterocycloalkyl, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), —N(R⁷)(C(═O)R⁸),—C(═O)—N(R⁵)(R⁶), —C(═O)—R⁸, —C(═O)—OR⁸, —N(R⁷)(S(═O)₂R⁸),—S(═O)₂—N(R⁵)(R⁶), —SR⁸, and —OR⁸, wherein each of said C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, and heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or3 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting ofhalogen, —CN, —OH, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₁₋₄haloalkoxy, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), —N(R⁷)(C(═O)R⁸), —C(═O)—OR⁸,—C(═O)H, —C(═O)R⁸, —C(═O)N(R⁵)(R⁶), —N(R⁷)(S(═O)₂R⁸), —S(═O)₂—N(R⁵)(R⁶),—SR⁸, and OR⁸;

R⁵ is H, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, or C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl;

R⁶ is H or selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄haloalkyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, a 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl, C₆₋₁₀aryl, a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (4-to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (C₆₋₁₀ aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-,and (5- to 10-membered heteroaryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, wherein each of theselections from the group is optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4substituents each independently selected from the group consisting of—OH, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ hydroxylalkyl, —S—C₁₋₄alkyl, —C(═O)H, —C(═O)—C₁₋₄ alkyl, —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₄ alkyl, —C(═O)—NH₂,—C(═O)—N(C₁₋₄ alkyl)₂, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy;

or R⁵ and R⁶ together with the N atom to which they are attached form a4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl or a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl,each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents eachindependently selected from the group consisting of halogen, —OH, oxo,—C(═O)H, —C(═O)OH, —C(═O)—C₁₋₄ alkyl, —C(═O)—NH₂, —C(═O)—N(C₁₋₄ alkyl)₂,—CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄ hydroxylalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, andC₁₋₄ haloalkoxy;

R⁷ is selected from the group consisting of H, C₁₋₄ alkyl, and C₃₋₇cycloalkyl;

R⁸ is selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl,a 4- to 14-membered heterocycloalkyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl, a 5- to 10-memberedheteroaryl, (C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (4- to 10-memberedheterocycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (C₆₋₁₀ aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, and (5- to10-membered heteroaryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, wherein each of the selections fromthe group is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents eachindependently selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CF₃, —CN,—OH, oxo, —S—C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy;

R⁹ is C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, —CN, —SF₅, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), C₁₋₆ alkoxy,C₁₋₆ haloalkoxy, C₃₋₇ cycloalkoxy, or C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, wherein each ofthe C₁₋₄ alkyl and C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2,3, 4, or 5 substituents each independently selected from the groupconsisting of halogen, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy;

each R¹⁰ is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen,—OH, —CN, —SF₅, —NO₂, oxo, thiono (“═S”), C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆ haloalkyl,C₁₋₆ hydroxylalkyl, C₁₋₆ alkoxy, C₁₋₆ haloalkoxy, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆ alkynyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl, a 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl,a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, (C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (4- to10-membered heterocycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (C₆₋₁₀ aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (5-to 10-membered heteroaryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), —N(R⁷)(C(═O)R⁸),—S(═O)₂N(R⁵)(R⁶), —C(═O)N(R⁵)(R⁶), —C(═O)—R⁸, —C(═O)—OR⁸, —SR⁸, and—OR⁸, wherein each of said C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl, 4-to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl, 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, (C₃₋₇cycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄alkyl-, (C₆₋₁₀ aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, and (5- to 10-memberedheteroaryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl- is optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4substituents each independently selected from the group consisting ofhalogen, OH, —CN, —NO₂, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ hydroxylalkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy,—N(R⁵)(R⁶), —S—(C₁₋₄ alkyl), —S(═O)₂—(C₁₋₄ alkyl), C₆₋₁₀ aryloxy,[(C₆₋₁₀ aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyloxy-optionally substituted with 1 or 2 C₁₋₄alkyl], oxo, —C(═O)H, —C(═O)—C₁₋₄ alkyl, —C(═O)O—C₁₋₄ alkyl, —C(═O)NH₂,—NHC(═O)H, —NHC(═O)—(C₁₋₄ alkyl), C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, a 5- or 6-memberedheteroaryl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy;

or R⁹ and an adjacent R¹⁰ together with the two ring atoms on Q¹ towhich they are attached form a fused benzene ring or a fused 5- or6-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5independently selected R^(10a); and

each R^(10a) is independently from the group consisting of halogen, —OH,—N(R⁵)(R⁶), —C(═O)OH, —C(═O)—C₁₋₄ alkyl, —C(═O)—NH₂, —C(═O)—N(C₁₋₄alkyl)₂, —CN, —SF₅, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄ hydroxylalkyl, C₁₋₄haloalkyl, and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy;

provided that the compound of Formula I is not4-(4-imidazol-1-yl-phenoxy)-3-methyl-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine.

The present invention also provides a composition (e.g., apharmaceutical composition) comprising a compound of Formula I(including an N-oxide thereof or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt ofthe compound or the N-oxide).

Compounds of Formula I (including N-oxides thereof and pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts of the compounds or the N-oxides) are D1 modulators(e.g., D1 agonists or partial agonists). According, the presentinvention further provides a method for treating a D1-mediated (orD1-associated) disorder (e.g., cognitive impairment such as cognitiveimpairment associated with schizophrenia or cognitive impairmentassociated with Alzheimer's disease; schizophrenia; Alzheimer's disease;or Parkinson's disease), comprising administering to a mammal (e.g., ahuman) in need thereof an amount of a compound of Formula I (including apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or an N-oxide of the compoundor salt) effective in modulating (e.g., agonizing or partiallyagonizing) D1.

As used herein, the term “adjacent” in describing the relative positionsof two substituent groups on a ring structure refers to two substituentgroups that are respectively attached to two ring-forming atoms of thesame ring, wherein the two ring-forming atoms are directly connectedthrough a chemical bond. For example, in each of the followingstructures:

either of the two R⁷⁰ groups is an adjacent group of R⁶⁰.

As used herein, the term “n-membered” where n is an integer typicallydescribes the number of ring-forming atoms in a moiety where the numberof ring-forming atoms is n. For example, pyridine is an example of a6-membered heteroaryl ring and thiophene is an example of a 5-memberedheteroaryl group.

At various places in the present specification, substituents ofcompounds of the invention are disclosed in groups or in ranges. It isspecifically intended that the invention include each and everyindividual subcombination of the members of such groups and ranges. Forexample, the term “C₁₋₆ alkyl” is specifically intended to include C₁alkyl (methyl), C₂ alkyl (ethyl), C₃ alkyl, C₄ alkyl, C₅ alkyl, and C₆alkyl. For another example, the term “a 5- to 10-membered heteroarylgroup” is specifically intended to include any 5-, 6-, 7-, 8-, 9- or10-membered heteroaryl group.

As used herein, the term “alkyl” is defined to include saturatedaliphatic hydrocarbons including straight chains and branched chains. Insome embodiments, the alkyl group has 1 to 6, e.g., 1 to 4, carbonatoms. For example, as used herein, the term “C₁₋₆ alkyl,” as well asthe alkyl moieties of other groups referred to herein (e.g., C₁₋₆alkoxy)refers to linear or branched radicals of 1 to 6 carbon atoms (e.g.,methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl,tert-butyl, n-pentyl, or n-hexyl), optionally substituted by 1 or more(such as 1 to 5) suitable substituents. The term “C₁₋₄ alkyl” refers tolinear or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon chains of 1 to 4 carbon atoms(i.e., methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl,tert-butyl). The term “C₁₋₃ alkyl” refers to linear or branchedaliphatic hydrocarbon chains of 1 to 3 carbon atoms

As used herein, the term “alkenyl” refers to aliphatic hydrocarbonshaving at least one carbon-carbon double bond, including straight chainsand branched chains having at least one carbon-carbon double bond. Insome embodiments, the alkenyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms. In someembodiments, the alkenyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms. For example, asused herein, the term “C₂₋₆ alkenyl” means straight or branched chainunsaturated radicals of 2 to 6 carbon atoms, including, but not limitedto, ethenyl, 1-propenyl, 2-propenyl (allyl), isopropenyl,2-methyl-1-propenyl, 1-butenyl, 2-butenyl, and the like, optionallysubstituted by 1 to 5 suitable substituents. When the compounds ofFormula I contain an alkenyl group, the alkenyl group may exist as thepure E form, the pure Z form, or any mixture thereof.

As used herein, the term “alkynyl” refers to aliphatic hydrocarbonshaving at least one carbon-carbon triple bond, including straight chainsand branched chains having at least one carbon-carbon triple bond. Insome embodiments, the alkynyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms. Forexample, as used herein, the term “C₂₋₆ alkynyl” is used herein to meanstraight or branched hydrocarbon chain alkynyl radicals as definedabove, having 2 to 6 carbon atoms and one triple bond, optionallysubstituted by 1 or more (such as 1 to 5) suitable substituents.

As used herein, the term “cycloalkyl” refers to saturated orunsaturated, non-aromatic, monocyclic or polycyclic (such as bicyclic)hydrocarbon rings (e.g., monocyclics such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl,cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclononyl, orbicyclics including spiro, fused, or bridged systems (such asbicyclo[1.1.1]pentanyl, bicyclo[2.2.1]heptanyl, bicyclo[3.2.1]octanyl orbicyclo[5.2.0]nonanyl, decahydronaphthalenyl, etc.), optionallysubstituted by 1 or more (such as 1 to 5) suitable substituents. Thecycloalkyl group has 3 to 15 carbon atoms. In some embodiments thecycloalkyl may optionally contain one, two or more non-cumulativenon-aromatic double or triple bonds and/or one to three oxo groups. Insome embodiments, the bicycloalkyl group has 6 to 15 carbon atoms. Forexample, the term “C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl” refers to saturated or unsaturated,non-aromatic, monocyclic or polycyclic (such as bicyclic) hydrocarbonrings of 3 to 7 ring-forming carbon atoms (e.g., cyclopropyl,cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, or bicyclo[1.1.1]pentanyl). Foranother example, the term “C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl” refers to saturated orunsaturated, non-aromatic, monocyclic or polycyclic (such as bicyclic)hydrocarbon rings of 3 to 6 ring-forming carbon atoms. For yet anotherexample, the term “C₃₋₄ cycloalkyl” refers to cyclopropyl or cyclobutyl.Also included in the definition of cycloalkyl are moieties that have oneor more aromatic rings (including aryl and heteroaryl) fused to thecycloalkyl ring, for example, benzo or thienyl derivatives ofcyclopentane, cyclopentene, cyclohexane, and the like (e.g.,2,3-dihydro-1H-indene-1-yl, or 1H-inden-2(3H)-one-1-yl). The cycloalkylgroup is optionally substituted by 1 or more (such as 1 to 5) suitablesubstituents.

As used herein, the term “aryl” refers to all-carbon monocyclic orfused-ring polycyclic aromatic groups having a conjugated pi-electronsystem. The aryl group has 6 or 10 carbon atoms in the ring(s). Mostcommonly, the aryl group has 6 carbon atoms in the ring. For example, asused herein, the term “C₆₋₁₀ aryl” means aromatic radicals containingfrom 6 to 10 carbon atoms such as phenyl or naphthyl. The aryl group isoptionally substituted by 1 or more (such as 1 to 5) suitablesubstituents.

As used herein, the term “heteroaryl” refers to monocyclic or fused-ringpolycyclic aromatic heterocyclic groups with one or more heteroatom ringmembers (ring-forming atoms) each independently selected from O, S and Nin at least one ring. The heteroaryl group has 5 to 14 ring-formingatoms, including 1 to 13 carbon atoms, and 1 to 8 heteroatoms selectedfrom O, S, and N. In some embodiments, the heteroaryl group has 5 to 10ring-forming atoms including one to four heteroatoms. The heteroarylgroup can also contain one to three oxo or thiono groups. In someembodiments, the heteroaryl group has 5 to 8 ring-forming atomsincluding one, two or three heteroatoms. Examples of monocyclicheteroaryls include those with 5 ring-forming atoms including one tothree heteroatoms or those with 6 ring-forming atoms including one, twoor three nitrogen heteroatoms. Examples of fused bicyclic heteroarylsinclude two fused 5- and/or 6-membered monocyclic rings including one tofour heteroatoms.

Examples of heteroaryl groups include pyridinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl,pyridazinyl, thienyl, furyl, imidazolyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl (e.g.,1,3-oxazolyl, 1,2-oxazolyl), thiazolyl (e.g., 1,2-thiazolyl,1,3-thiazolyl), pyrazolyl, tetrazolyl, triazolyl (e.g., 1,2,3-triazolyl,1,2,4-triazolyl), oxadiazolyl (e.g., 1,2,3-oxadiazolyl), thiadiazolyl(e.g., 1,3,4-thiadiazolyl), quinolyl, isoquinolyl, benzothienyl,benzofuryl, indolyl, 1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridinyl,imidazo[1,2-a]pyridinyl, 1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridinyl,imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazinyl, imidazo[2,1-c][1,2,4]triazinyl,imidazo[1,5-a]pyrazinyl, imidazo[1,2-a]pyrimidinyl, 1H-indazolyl,9H-purinyl, imidazo[1,2-a]pyrimidinyl,[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrimidinyl, [1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-b]pyridazinyl,isoxazolo[5,4-c]pyridazinyl, isoxazolo[3,4-c]pyridazinyl, pyridone,pyrimidone, pyrazinone, pyrimidinone, 1H-imidazol-2(3H)-one,1H-pyrrole-2,5-dione, 3-oxo-2H-pyridazinyl, 1H-2-oxo-pyrimidinyl,1H-2-oxo-pyridinyl, 2,4(1H,3H)-dioxo-pyrimidinyl, 1H-2-oxo-pyrazinyl,and the like. The heteroaryl group is optionally substituted by 1 ormore (such as 1 to 5) suitable substituents.

As used herein, the term “N-containing” when used in connection with aheteroaryl or heterocycloalkyl means that the heteroaryl orheterocycloalkyl comprises at least one ring-forming nitrogen (N) atomand optionally one or more (e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4) ring-formingheteroatoms each independently selected from O, S and N. The term“N-containing 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl” refers to a 5- to10-membered heteroaryl group (including monocyclic or bicyclic systems)comprising at least one ring-forming nitrogen (N) atom and optionallyone or more (e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4) ring-forming heteroatoms eachindependently selected from O, S and N. The term “N-containing 5- or6-membered heteroaryl” refers to a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl groupcomprising at least one ring-forming nitrogen (N) atom and optionallyone or more (e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4) ring-forming heteroatoms eachindependently selected from O, S and N. Examples of N-containing 5- to10-membered heteroaryl groups include pyridinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl,pyridazinyl, imidazolyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl (e.g., 1,3-oxazolyl,1,2-oxazolyl), thiazolyl (e.g., 1,2-thiazolyl, 1,3-thiazolyl),pyrazolyl, tetrazolyl, triazolyl (e.g., 1,2,3-triazolyl,1,2,4-triazolyl), oxadiazolyl (e.g., 1,2,3-oxadiazolyl), thiadiazolyl(e.g., 1,3,4-thiadiazolyl), quinolyl, isoquinolyl,1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridinyl, imidazo[1,2-a]pyridinyl,1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridinyl, imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazinyl,imidazo[2,1-c][1,2,4]triazinyl, imidazo[1,5-a]pyrazinyl,imidazo[1,2-a]pyrimidinyl, 1H-indazolyl, 9H-purinyl,imidazo[1,2-a]pyrimidinyl, [1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrimidinyl,[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-b]pyridazinyl, isoxazolo[5,4-c]pyridazinyl,isoxazolo[3,4-c]pyridazinyl, pyridone, pyrimidone, pyrazinone,pyrimidinone, 1H-imidazol-2(3H)-one, 1H-pyrrole-2,5-dione,3-oxo-2H-pyridazinyl, 1H-2-oxo-pyrimidinyl (e.g.,1H-2-oxo-pyrimidin-6-yl), 1H-2-oxo-pyridinyl,2,4(1H,3H)-dioxo-pyrimidinyl, 1H-2-oxo-pyrazinyl, and the like. Examplesof N-containing 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl groups include pyridinyl,pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, imidazolyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl(e.g., 1,3-oxazolyl, 1,2-oxazolyl), thiazolyl (e.g., 1,2-thiazolyl,1,3-thiazolyl), pyrazolyl, tetrazolyl, triazolyl (e.g., 1,2,3-triazolyl,1,2,4-triazolyl), oxadiazolyl (e.g., 1,2,3-oxadiazolyl), thiadiazolyl(e.g., 1,3,4-thiadiazolyl), 3-oxo-2H-pyridazinyl, 1H-2-oxo-pyrimidinyl(e.g., 1H-2-oxo-pyrimidin-6-yl), 1H-2-oxo-pyridinyl,2,4(1H,3H)-dioxo-pyrimidinyl, and 1H-2-oxo-pyrazinyl. The N-containing5- to 10-membered heteroaryl group or the N-containing 5- or 6-memberedheteroaryl is optionally substituted by 1 or more (such as 1 to 5)suitable substituents.

As used herein, the term “heterocycloalkyl” refers to a monocyclic orpolycyclic [including 2 or more rings that are fused together, includingspiro, fused, or bridged systems, for example, a bicyclic ring system],saturated or unsaturated, non-aromatic 4- to 15-membered ring system(such as a 4- to 14-membered ring system, 4- to 10-membered ring system,5- to 10-membered ring system, 4- to 7-membered ring system, or 5- to6-membered ring system), including 1 to 14 ring-forming carbon atoms and1 to 10 ring-forming heteroatoms each independently selected from O, Sand N. For example, the term “4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl” refersto a monocyclic or polycyclic, saturated or unsaturated, non-aromatic 4-to 10-membered ring system that comprises one or more ring-formingheteroatoms each independently selected from O, S and N. For anotherexample, the term “4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl” refers to amonocyclic or polycyclic, saturated or unsaturated, non-aromatic 4- to7-membered ring system that comprises one or more ring-formingheteroatoms each independently selected from O, S and N. For yet anotherexample, the term “5- to 6-membered heterocycloalkyl” refers to amonocyclic, saturated or unsaturated, non-aromatic 5- to 6-membered ringsystem that comprises one or more ring-forming heteroatoms eachindependently selected from O, S and N. The heterocycloalkyl group isoptionally substituted by 1 or more (such as 1 to 5) suitablesubstituents. The heterocycloalkyl group can also include one to threeoxo or thiono groups.

Examples of such heterocycloalkyl rings include azetidinyl,tetrahydrofuranyl, imidazolidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl,piperazinyl, oxazolidinyl, thiazolidinyl, pyrazolidinyl,thiomorpholinyl, tetrahydrothiazinyl, tetrahydrothiadiazinyl,morpholinyl, oxetanyl, tetrahydrodiazinyl, oxazinyl, oxathiazinyl,quinuclidinyl, chromanyl, isochromanyl, benzoxazinyl,2-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptanonyl, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexanyl,3-azabicyclo[4.1.0]heptanyl and the like. Further examples ofheterocycloalkyl rings include tetrahydrofuran-2-yl,tetrahydrofuran-3-yl, imidazolidin-1-yl, imidazolidin-2-yl,imidazolidin-4-yl, pyrrolidin-1-yl, pyrrolidin-2-yl, pyrrolidin-3-yl,piperidin-1-yl, piperidin-2-yl, piperidin-3-yl, piperidin-4-yl,piperazin-1-yl, piperazin-2-yl, 1,3-oxazolidin-3-yl, 1,4-oxazepan-1-yl,isothiazolidinyl, 1,3-thiazolidin-3-yl, 1,2-pyrazolidin-2-yl,1,2-tetrahydrothiazin-2-yl, 1,3-thiazinan-3-yl,1,2-tetrahydrodiazin-2-yl, 1,3-tetrahydrodiazin-1-yl, 1,4-oxazin-4-yl,oxazolidinonyl, 2-oxo-piperidinyl (e.g., 2-oxo-piperidin-1-yl), and thelike. Also included in the definition of heterocycloalkyl are moietiesthat have one or more aromatic rings (including aryl and heteroaryl)fused to the nonaromatic heterocycloalkyl ring, for example pyridinyl,pyrimidinyl, thiophenyl, pyrazolyl, phthalimidyl, naphthalimidyl, andbenzo derivatives of the nonaromatic heterocycloalkyl rings. Examples ofsuch aromatic-fused heterocycloalkyl groups include indolinyl,isoindolinyl, isoindolin-1-one-3-yl,5,7-dihydro-6H-pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridin-6-yl,6,7-dihydro-5H-pyrrolo[3,4-d]pyrimidin-6-yl,4,5,6,7-tetrahydrothieno[2,3-c]pyridine-5-yl,5,6-dihydrothieno[2,3-c]pyridin-7(4H)-one-5-yl,1,4,5,6-tetrahydropyrrolo[3,4-c]pyrazol-5-yl, and3,4-dihydroisoquinolin-1(2H)-one-3-yl groups. The heterocycloalkyl groupis optionally substituted by 1 or more (such as 1 to 5) suitablesubstituents. Examples of heterocycloalkyl groups include 5- or6-membered monocyclic rings and 9- or 10-membered fused bicyclic rings.

As used herein, the term “N-containing 4- to 10-memberedheterocycloalkyl” refers to a 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl groupcomprising at least one ring-forming nitrogen (N) atom and optionallyone or more ring-forming heteroatoms each independently selected from O,S and N. The term “N-containing 5- or 6-membered heterocycloalkyl”refers to a 5- or 6-membered heterocycloalkyl group comprising at leastone ring-forming nitrogen (N) atom and optionally one or morering-forming heteroatoms each independently selected from O, S and N.Examples of N-containing 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl groupsinclude azetidinyl, piperidin-1-yl, piperidin-4-yl, piperazin-1-yl,1,3-thiazinan-3-yl, 1,4,5,6-tetrahydropyrrolo[3,4-c]pyrazol-5-yl, and3,4-dihydroisoquinolin-1(2H)-one-3-yl. Examples of N-containing 5- or6-membered heterocycloalkyl groups include piperidin-1-yl,piperidin-4-yl, piperazin-1-yl, 1,3-thiazinan-3-yl, and morpholino. TheN-containing 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl or the N-containing 5-or 6-membered heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted by 1 or more(such as 1 to 5) suitable substituents.

As used herein, the term “halo” or “halogen” group is defined to includefluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.

As used herein, the term “haloalkyl” refers to an alkyl group having oneor more halogen substituents (up to perhaloalkyl, i.e., every hydrogenatom of the alkyl group has been replaced by a halogen atom). Forexample, the term “C₁₋₆ haloalkyl” refers to a C₁₋₆ alkyl group havingone or more halogen substituents (up to perhaloalkyl, i.e., everyhydrogen atom of the alkyl group has been replaced by a halogen atom).The term “C₁₋₄ haloalkyl” refers to a C₁₋₄ alkyl group having one ormore halogen substituents (up to perhaloalkyl, i.e., every hydrogen atomof the alkyl group has been replaced by a halogen atom). The term “C₁₋₃haloalkyl” refers to a C₁₋₃ alkyl group having one or more halogensubstituents (up to perhaloalkyl, i.e., every hydrogen atom of the alkylgroup has been replaced by a halogen atom). The term “C₁ haloalkyl”refers to a methyl group having one, two, or three halogen substituents.Examples of haloalkyl groups include CF₃, C₂F₅, CHF₂, CH₂F, CH₂CF₃,CH₂Cl and the like.

As used herein, the term “alkoxy” or “alkyloxy” refers to an —O-alkylgroup. The term “C₁₋₆ alkoxy” or “C₁₋₆ alkyloxy” refers to an —O—(C₁₋₆alkyl) group. The term “C₁₋₄ alkoxy” or “C₁₋₄ alkyloxy” refers to an—O—(C₁₋₄ alkyl) group. The term “C₁₋₃ alkoxy” or “C₁₋₃ alkyloxy” refersto an —O—(C₁₋₃ alkyl) group. Examples of alkoxy include methoxy, ethoxy,propoxy (e.g., n-propoxy and isopropoxy), tert-butoxy, and the like.

As used here, the term “haloalkoxy” refers to an —O-haloalkyl group. Theterm “C₁₋₆ haloalkoxy” refers to an —O—(C₁₋₆ haloalkyl) group. The term“C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy” refers to an —O—(C₁₋₄ haloalkyl) group. The term “C₁₋₃haloalkoxy” refers to an —O—(C₁₋₃ haloalkyl) group. The term “C₁haloalkoxy” refers to a methoxy group having one, two, or three halogensubstituents. An example of a haloalkoxy group is —OCF₃ or —OCHF₂.

As used herein, the term “cycloalkoxy” or “cycloalkyloxy” refers to an—O-cycloalkyl group. The term “C₃₋₇ cycloalkoxy” or “C₃₋₇ cycloalkyloxy”refers to an —O—(C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl) group. Examples of cycloalkoxy includeC₃₋₇ cycloalkoxy (e.g., cyclopropoxy, cyclobutoxy, cyclopentoxy, and thelike).

As used here, the term “C₆₋₁₀ aryloxy” refers to an O—(C₆₋₁₀ aryl)group. An example of a C₆₋₁₀ aryloxy group is —O-phenyl [i.e., phenoxy].

As used herein, the term “fluoroalkyl” refers to an alkyl group havingone or more fluorine substituents (up to perfluoroalkyl, i.e., everyhydrogen atom of the alkyl group has been replaced by fluorine). Forexample, the term “C₁₋₆ fluoroalkyl” refers to a C₁₋₆ alkyl group havingone or more fluorine substituents (up to perfluoroalkyl, i.e., everyhydrogen atom of the C₁₋₆ alkyl group has been replaced by fluorine).The term “C₁ fluoroalkyl” refers to a C₁ alkyl group (i.e., methyl)having 1, 2, or 3 fluorine substituents). Examples of fluoroalkyl groupsinclude CF₃, C₂F₅, CH₂CF₃, CHF₂, CH₂F, and the like.

As used here, the term “fluoroalkoxy” refers to an —O-fluoroalkyl group.The term “C₁ fluoroalkoxy” refers to a methoxy group having one, two, orthree fluorine substituents. An example of a C₁ fluoroalkoxy group is—OCF₃ or —OCHF₂.

As used herein, the term “fluorocyclopropyl” refers to a cyclopropylgroup having one or more fluorine substituents (up toperfluorocyclopropyl, i.e., every hydrogen atom of the cyclopropyl grouphas been replaced by fluorine). Examples of fluorocyclopropyl include2-fluoro-cyclopropan-1-yl or 2,3-difluorocyclopropan-1-yl.

As used herein, the term “hydroxylalkyl” or “hydroxyalkyl” refers to analkyl group having one or more (e.g., 1, 2, or 3) OH substituents. Theterm “C₁₋₆ hydroxylalkyl” or “C₁₋₆ hydroxyalkyl” refers to a C₁₋₆ alkylgroup having one or more (e.g., 1, 2, or 3) OH substituents. The term“C₁₋₄ hydroxylalkyl” or “C₁₋₄ hydroxyalkyl” refers to a C₁₋₄ alkyl grouphaving one or more (e.g., 1, 2, or 3) OH substituents. Examples ofhydroxylalkyl groups include —CH₂OH and —CH₂CH₂OH.

As used herein, the term “oxo” refers to ═O. When an oxo is substitutedon a carbon atom, they together form a carbonyl moiety [—C(═O)—]. Whenan oxo is substituted on a sulfur atom, they together form a sulfinylmoiety [—S(═O)—]; when two oxo groups are substituted on a sulfur atom,they together form a sulfonyl moiety [—S(═O)₂—].

As used herein, the term “thiono” refers to ═S. When an thiono issubstituted on a carbon atom, they together form a moiety having thestructure of —C(═S)—.

As used herein, the term “optionally substituted” means thatsubstitution is optional and therefore includes both unsubstituted andsubstituted atoms and moieties. A “substituted” atom or moiety indicatesthat any hydrogen on the designated atom or moiety can be replaced witha selection from the indicated substituent group (up to that everyhydrogen atom on the designated atom or moiety is replaced with aselection from the indicated substituent group), provided that thenormal valency of the designated atom or moiety is not exceeded, andthat the substitution results in a stable compound. For example, if amethyl group (i.e., CH₃) is optionally substituted, then up to 3hydrogen atoms on the carbon atom can be replaced with substituentgroups.

As used herein, unless specified, the point of attachment of asubstituent can be from any suitable position of the substituent. Forexample, piperidinyl can be piperidin-1-yl (attached through the N atomof the piperidinyl), piperidin-2-yl (attached through the C atom at the2-position of the piperidinyl), piperidin-3-yl (attached through the Catom at the 3-position of the piperidinyl), or piperidin-4-yl (attachedthrough the C atom at the 4-position of the piperidinyl). For anotherexample, pyridinyl (or pyridyl) can be 2-pyridinyl (or pyridin-2-yl),3-pyridinyl (or pyridin-3-yl), or 4-pyridinyl (or pyridin-4-yl).

When a bond to a substituent is shown to cross a bond connecting twoatoms in a ring, then such substituent may be bonded to any of thering-forming atoms in that ring that are substitutable (i.e., bonded toone or more hydrogen atoms). For example, as shown in Formula a-101below, R¹⁰ may be bonded to either of the two ring carbon atoms, each ofwhich bears a hydrogen atom. For another example, as shown in Moiety M¹below, an R¹⁰ may be bonded to any ring-forming atom that issubstitutable (i.e., bonded to one or more hydrogen atoms; for example,a C or N ring-forming atom). For yet another example, as shown inFormula a-102 below (a substituted imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine ring), R¹⁰ maybe bonded to either of the two ring carbon atoms in the pyrazine ring(each of which bears a hydrogen atom), and R^(10a) may be bonded toeither of the two ring carbon atoms in the imidazo ring (each of whichbears a hydrogen atom).

When a substituted or optionally substituted moiety is described withoutindicating the atom via which such moiety is bonded to a substituent,then a substituent may be bonded via any appropriate atom in suchmoiety. For example in a substituted arylalkyl, a substituent on thearylalkyl [e.g., (C₆₋₁₀ aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-] can be bonded to any carbonatom on the alkyl part or on the aryl part of the arylalkyl.Combinations of substituents and/or variables are permissible only ifsuch combinations result in stable compounds.

As noted above, the compounds of Formula I may exist in the form ofpharmaceutically acceptable salts such as acid addition salts and/orbase addition salts of the compounds of Formula I. The phrase“pharmaceutically acceptable salt(s)”, as used herein, unless otherwiseindicated, includes acid addition or base salts which may be present inthe compounds of Formula I.

Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds of Formula I includethe acid addition and base salts thereof.

Suitable acid addition salts are formed from acids which form non-toxicsalts. Examples include the acetate, adipate, aspartate, benzoate,besylate, bicarbonate/carbonate, bisulfate/sulfate, borate,camphorsulfonate, citrate, cyclamate, edisylate, esylate, formate,fumarate, gluceptate, gluconate, glucuronate, hexafluorophosphate,hibenzate, hydrochloride/chloride, hydrobromide/bromide,hydroiodide/iodide, isethionate, lactate, malate, maleate, malonate,mesylate, methylsulfate, naphthylate, 2-napsylate, nicotinate, nitrate,orotate, oxalate, palmitate, pamoate, phosphate/hydrogenphosphate/dihydrogen phosphate, pyroglutamate, saccharate, stearate,succinate, tannate, tartrate, tosylate, trifluoroacetate and xinofoatesalts.

Suitable base salts are formed from bases which form non-toxic salts.Examples include the aluminium, arginine, benzathine, calcium, choline,diethylamine, diolamine, glycine, lysine, magnesium, meglumine, olamine,potassium, sodium, tromethamine and zinc salts.

Hemisalts of acids and bases may also be formed, for example,hemisulfate and hemicalcium salts.

For a review on suitable salts, see “Handbook of Pharmaceutical Salts:Properties, Selection, and Use” by Stahl and Wermuth (Wiley-VCH, 2002).Methods for making pharmaceutically acceptable salts of compounds ofFormula I are known to one of skill in the art.

As used herein the terms “Formula I”, “Formula I or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts thereof”, “pharmaceutically acceptable salts of thecompound or the salt [of Formula I]” are defined to include all forms ofthe compound of Formula I, including hydrates, solvates, isomers(including for example rotational stereoisomers), crystalline andnon-crystalline forms, isomorphs, polymorphs, metabolites, and prodrugsthereof.

As it is known to the person skilled in the art, amine compounds (I.e.,those comprising one or more nitrogen atoms), for example tertiaryamines, can form N-oxides (also known as amine oxides or amineN-oxides). An N-oxide has the formula of (R¹⁰⁰R²⁰⁰R³⁰⁰)N⁺—O⁻ wherein theparent amine (R¹⁰⁰R²⁰⁰R³⁰⁰)N can be for example, a tertiary amine (forexample, each of R¹⁰⁰, R²⁰⁰, R³⁰⁰ is independently alkyl, arylalkyl,aryl, heteroaryl, or the like), a heterocyclic or heteroaromatic amine[for example, (R¹⁰⁰R²⁰⁰R³⁰⁰)N together ether forms 1-alkylpiperidine,1-alkylpyrrolidine, 1-benzylpyrrolidine, or pyridine]. For instance, animine nitrogen, especially heterocyclic or heteroaromatic iminenitrogen, or pyridine-type nitrogen

atom [such as a nitrogen atom in pyridine, pyridazine, or pyrazine], canbe N-oxidized to form the N-oxide comprising the group

Thus, a compound according to the present invention comprising one ormore nitrogen atoms (e.g., an imine nitrogen atom), for example, as apart of Q¹ of Formula I, may be capable of forming an N-oxide thereof(e.g., mono-N-oxides, bis-N-oxides or multi-N-oxides, or mixturesthereof depending on the number of nitrogen atoms suitable to formstable N-oxides). For example, a compound of Formula I wherein Q¹ is anoptionally substituted pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, pyridinyl, or pyridazinylcan be oxidized (e.g., in the presence of a suitable oxidizing reagentsuch as m-chloroperoxybenzoic acid or in the presence of a suitableenzyme) to form its corresponding N-oxide wherein Q¹ is converted to itscorresponding N-oxide form. For another example, a compound of Formula Iwherein Q¹ is Q¹-101 can be oxidized to form its corresponding N-oxidewherein Q¹-101 is converted to Q¹-102.

As used herein, the term “N-oxide(s)” refer to all possible, and inparticular all stable, N-oxide forms of the amine compounds (e.g.,compounds comprising one or more imine nitrogen atoms) described herein,such as mono-N-oxides (including different isomers when more than onenitrogen atom of an amine compound can form a mono-N-oxide) ormulti-N-oxides (e.g., bis-N-oxides), or mixtures thereof in any ratio.

The compounds of Formula I can be converted, optionally, into N-oxidesthereof, for example, in the presence of a suitable oxidizing reagent ina suitable solvent (e.g., in the presence of hydrogen peroxide inmethanol or in the presence of m-chloroperoxybenzoic acid indichloromethane) or in the presence of an enzyme (e.g. forming anN-oxide thereof as a metabolite). One skilled in the art would readilyrecognize the reaction conditions suitable for carrying out theN-oxidation reactions.

Compounds of Formula I described herein (compounds of the invention)include N-oxides thereof and pharmaceutically acceptable salts of thecompounds or the N-oxides. Examples of N-oxides of compounds of FormulaI include those wherein Q¹ of Formula I (e.g., an optionally substitutedpyrimidinyl such as Q¹-101) may be capable of forming an N-oxidethereof.

Compounds of Formula I may exist in a continuum of solid states rangingfrom fully amorphous to fully crystalline. The term ‘amorphous’ refersto a state in which the material lacks long-range order at the molecularlevel and, depending upon temperature, may exhibit the physicalproperties of a solid or a liquid. Typically such materials do not givedistinctive X-ray diffraction patterns and, while exhibiting theproperties of a solid, are more formally described as a liquid. Uponheating, a change from apparent solid to a material with liquidproperties occurs, which is characterised by a change of state,typically second order (‘glass transition’). The term ‘crystalline’refers to a solid phase in which the material has a regular orderedinternal structure at the molecular level and gives a distinctive X-raydiffraction pattern with defined peaks. Such materials when heatedsufficiently will also exhibit the properties of a liquid, but thechange from solid to liquid is characterized by a phase change,typically first order (‘melting point’).

Compounds of Formula I may exist in unsolvated and solvated forms. Whenthe solvent or water is tightly bound, the complex will have awell-defined stoichiometry independent of humidity. When, however, thesolvent or water is weakly bound, as in channel solvates and hygroscopiccompounds, the water/solvent content will be dependent on humidity anddrying conditions. In such cases, non-stoichiometry will be the norm.

The compounds of Formula I may exist as clathrates or other complexes(e.g., co-crystals). Included within the scope of the invention arecomplexes such as clathrates, drug-host inclusion complexes wherein thedrug and host are present in stoichiometric or non-stoichiometricamounts. Also included are complexes of the compounds of Formula Icontaining two or more organic and/or inorganic components, which may bein stoichiometric or non-stoichiometric amounts. The resulting complexesmay be ionized, partially ionized, or non-ionized. Co-crystals aretypically defined as crystalline complexes of neutral molecularconstituents that are bound together through non-covalent interactions,but could also be a complex of a neutral molecule with a salt.Co-crystals may be prepared by melt crystallization, byrecrystallization from solvents, or by physically grinding thecomponents together; see O. Almarsson and M. J. Zaworotko, Chem. Commun.2004, 17, 1889-1896. For a general review of multi-component complexes,see J. K. Haleblian, J. Pharm. Sci. 1975, 64, 1269-1288.

The compounds of the invention may also exist in a mesomorphic state(mesophase or liquid crystal) when subjected to suitable conditions. Themesomorphic state is intermediate between the true crystalline state andthe true liquid state (either melt or solution). Mesomorphism arising asthe result of a change in temperature is described as ‘thermotropic’ andthat resulting from the addition of a second component, such as water oranother solvent, is described as ‘lyotropic’. Compounds that have thepotential to form lyotropic mesophases are described as ‘amphiphilic’and consist of molecules which possess an ionic (such as —COO⁻Na⁺,—COO⁻K⁺, or —SO₃ ⁻Na⁺) or non-ionic (such as —N⁻N⁺(CH₃)₃) polar headgroup. For more information, see Crystals and the Polarizing Microscopeby N. H. Hartshorne and A. Stuart, 4^(th) Edition (Edward Arnold, 1970).

The invention also relates to prodrugs of the compounds of Formula I.Thus certain derivatives of compounds of Formula I which may have littleor no pharmacological activity themselves can, when administered into oronto the body, be converted into compounds of Formula I having thedesired activity, for example, by hydrolytic cleavage. Such derivativesare referred to as “prodrugs”. Further information on the use ofprodrugs may be found in Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems, Vol. 14,ACS Symposium Series (T. Higuchi and W. Stella) and BioreversibleCarriers in Drug Design, Pergamon Press, 1987 (Ed. E. B. Roche, AmericanPharmaceutical Association).

Prodrugs in accordance with the invention can, for example, be producedby replacing appropriate functionalities present in the compounds ofFormula I with certain moieties known to those skilled in the art as‘pro-moieties’ as described, for example, in Design of Prodrugs by H.Bundgaard (Elsevier, 1985).

Moreover, certain compounds of Formula I may themselves act as prodrugsof other compounds of Formula I.

Also included within the scope of the invention are metabolites ofcompounds of Formula I, that is, compounds formed in vivo uponadministration of the drug. Examples of metabolites of compounds ofFormula I include N-oxides of compounds of Formula I wherein Q¹ ofFormula I may be capable of forming an N-oxide thereof (e.g., wherein Q¹is an optionally substituted pyrimidinyl such as4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl).

In some embodiments, the compounds of Formula I include N-oxides thereofand pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds or the N-oxides.

The compounds of Formula I include all stereoisomers and tautomers.Stereoisomers of Formula I include cis and trans isomers, opticalisomers such as R and S enantiomers, diastereomers, geometric isomers,rotational isomers, atropisomers, and conformational isomers of thecompounds of Formula I, including compounds exhibiting more than onetype of isomerism; and mixtures thereof (such as racemates anddiastereomeric pairs). Also included are acid addition or base additionsalts wherein the counterion is optically active, for example, D-lactateor L-lysine, or racemic, for example, DL-tartrate or DL-arginine.

In some embodiments, the compounds of Formula I may have asymmetriccarbon atoms. The carbon-carbon bonds of the compounds of Formula I maybe depicted herein using a solid line (

) a solid wedge (

) or a dotted wedge (

). The use of a solid line to depict bonds to asymmetric carbon atoms ismeant to indicate that all possible stereoisomers (e.g., specificenantiomers, racemic mixtures, etc.) at that carbon atom are included.The use of either a solid or dotted wedge to depict bonds to asymmetriccarbon atoms is meant to indicate that only the stereoisomer shown ismeant to be included. It is possible that compounds of Formula I maycontain more than one asymmetric carbon atom. In those compounds, theuse of a solid line to depict bonds to asymmetric carbon atoms is meantto indicate that all possible stereoisomers are meant to be included.For example, unless stated otherwise, it is intended that the compoundsof Formula I can exist as enantiomers and diastereomers or as racematesand mixtures thereof. The use of a solid line to depict bonds to one ormore asymmetric carbon atoms in a compound of Formula I and the use of asolid or dotted wedge to depict bonds to other asymmetric carbon atomsin the same compound is meant to indicate that a mixture ofdiastereomers is present.

In some embodiments, the compounds of Formula I may exist in and/or beisolated as atropisomers (e.g., one or more atropenantiomers). Thoseskilled in the art would recognize that atropisomerism may exist in acompound that has two or more aromatic rings (for example, two aromaticrings linked through a single bond). See e.g., Freedman, T. B. et al.,Absolute Configuration Determination of Chiral Molecules in the SolutionState Using Vibrational Circular Dichroism. Chirality 2003, 15, 743-758;and Bringmann, G. et al., Atroposelective Synthesis of Axially ChiralBiaryl Compounds. Angew. Chem., Int. Ed. 2005, 44, 5384-5427.

When any racemate crystallizes, crystals of different types arepossible. One type is the racemic compound (true racemate) wherein onehomogeneous form of crystal is produced containing both enantiomers inequimolar amounts. Another type is a racemic mixture or conglomeratewherein two forms of crystal are produced in equal or different molaramounts each comprising a single enantiomer.

The compounds of Formula I may exhibit the phenomena of tautomerism andstructural isomerism. For example, the compounds of Formula I may existin several tautomeric forms, including the enol and imine form, and theketo and enamine form and geometric isomers and mixtures thereof. Allsuch tautomeric forms are included within the scope of the compounds ofFormula I. Tautomers may exist as mixtures of a tautomeric set insolution. In solid form, usually one tautomer predominates. Even thoughone tautomer may be described, the present invention includes alltautomers of the compounds of Formula I. For example, when one of thefollowing two tautomers of the invention is disclosed in theexperimental section herein, those skilled in the art would readilyrecognize that the invention also includes the other.

The present invention includes all pharmaceutically acceptableisotopically-labelled compounds of Formula I wherein one or more atomsare replaced by atoms having the same atomic number, but an atomic massor mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number whichpredominates in nature.

Examples of isotopes suitable for inclusion in the compounds of theinvention include isotopes of hydrogen, such as ²H and ³H, carbon, suchas ¹¹C, ¹³C and ¹⁴C, chlorine, such as ³⁶Cl, fluorine, such as ¹⁸F,iodine, such as ¹²³I and ¹²⁵I, nitrogen, such as ¹³N and ¹⁵N, oxygen,such as ¹⁵O, ¹⁷O and ¹⁸O, phosphorus, such as ³²P, and sulphur, such as³⁵S.

Certain isotopically-labelled compounds of Formula I, for example, thoseincorporating a radioactive isotope, are useful in drug and/or substratetissue distribution studies. The radioactive isotopes tritium, i.e., ³H,and carbon-14, i.e., ¹⁴C, are particularly useful for this purpose inview of their ease of incorporation and ready means of detection.

Substitution with heavier isotopes such as deuterium, i.e., ²H, mayafford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolicstability, for example, increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosagerequirements, and hence may be preferred in some circumstances.

Substitution with positron-emitting isotopes, such as ¹¹C, ¹⁸F ¹⁵O and a¹³N, can be useful in Positron Emission Topography (PET) studies forexamining substrate receptor occupancy.

Isotopically-labeled compounds of Formula I (or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts thereof or N-oxides of the compounds or salts) cangenerally be prepared by conventional techniques known to those skilledin the art or by processes analogous to those described in theaccompanying Examples and Preparations using an appropriateisotopically-labeled reagent in place of the non-labeled reagentpreviously employed.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula Iwherein X¹ is N.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula Iwherein X¹ is CT⁴.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula Iwherein each of T¹, T², T³, and T⁴ is independently selected from thegroup consisting of H, F, —CN, methoxy, C₁ fluoroalkoxy, methyl, and C₁fluoroalkyl. In a further embodiment, T¹ is H. In a yet furtherembodiment, T² is H. In a still further embodiment, T³ is H, methyl or—CN. In a still further embodiment, T³ is H. In a still furtherembodiment, T⁴ is H.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula Iwherein T³ is H. In a further embodiment, T² is H and T³ is H.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula Iwherein the compound is a compound of Formula Ia or Ib:

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula Iwherein the compound is a compound of Formula Ia.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula Iwherein the compound is a compound of Formula Ib.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein:

each of R¹ and R² is independently selected from the group consisting ofH, halogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄haloalkoxy, and C₃₋₄ cycloalkyl;

each of R³ and R⁴ is independently selected from the group consisting ofH, halogen, —OH, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, C₃₋₄cycloalkyl, a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), and —OR⁸,

each of R⁵ and R⁶ independently is H or selected from the groupconsisting of C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, and C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl;

or R⁵ and R⁶ together with the N atom to which they are attached form a4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl or a 5-membered heteroaryl, eachoptionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents each independentlyselected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy; and

R⁸ is selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl,a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, phenyl, and a 5- to 6-memberedheteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituentseach independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN,C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, and C₁₋₄haloalkoxy;

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein each of R¹ and R² isindependently H or halogen. In a further embodiment, each of R¹ and R²is independently H or F. In a yet further embodiment, R¹ is H and R² isH or F. In a still further embodiment, each of R¹ and R² is H

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein each of R³ and R⁴ isindependently H, halogen, —CN, methyl, C₁ haloalkyl, methoxy, or C₁haloalkoxy. In a further embodiment, each of R³ and R⁴ is independentlyH, halogen, —CN, methyl, or C₁ haloalkyl. In a yet further embodiment,R³ is H and R⁴ is H, F, Cl, —CN, methyl, or C₁ haloalkyl. In a stillfurther embodiment, R³ is H and R⁴ is H, F, or methyl. In a yet stillfurther embodiment, R³ is H and R⁴ is methyl.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein R¹ is H; R² is H orF; R³ is H and R⁴ is H, F, Cl, —CN, methyl, or C₁ haloalkyl. In afurther embodiment, each of R¹, R², and R³ is H and R⁴ is H, or methyl.In a still further embodiment, R⁴ is methyl.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein each of R² and R⁴ isH.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein:

Q¹ is a moiety of

(“Moiety M¹”);

ring Q^(1a) is an N-containing 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl or anN-containing 5- to 6-membered heterocycloalkyl;

represents a single bond or double bond;

each of Z¹ and Z² is independently C or N;

R⁹ is C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, —CN, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆ haloalkoxy, or C₃₋₇ cycloalkoxy, wherein each of the C₁₋₄alkyl and C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, or5 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting ofhalogen, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy;

each R¹⁰ is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen,—OH, —CN, —NO₂, Oxo, thiono, C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆ haloalkyl, C₁₋₆hydroxylalkyl, C₁₋₆ alkoxy, C₁₋₆ haloalkoxy, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆ alkynyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl, a 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl,a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, (C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (4- to10-membered heterocycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (C₆₋₁₀ aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (5-to 10-membered heteroaryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (5- to 10-memberedheteroaryl)-C₂₋₄ alkenyl-, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), —N(R⁷)(C(═O)R⁸),—S(═O)₂N(R⁵)(R⁶), —C(═O)—N(R⁵)(R⁶), —C(═O)—R⁸, —C(═O)—OR⁸, and —OR⁸,wherein each of said C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl, 4- to10-membered heterocycloalkyl, 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, (C₃₋₇cycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄alkyl-, (C₆₋₁₀ aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (5- to 10-membered heteroaryl)-C₁₋₄alkyl-, and (5- to 10-membered heteroaryl)-C₂₋₄ alkenyl- is optionallysubstituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selectedfrom the group consisting of halogen, OH, —CN, —NO₂, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄hydroxylalkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), —S—(C₁₋₄ alkyl), —S(═O)₂—(C₁₋₄alkyl), C₆₋₁₀ aryloxy, (C₆₋₁₀ aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyloxy- optionallysubstituted with 1 or 2 C₁₋₄ alkyl, oxo, —C(═O)H, —C(═O)—C₁₋₄ alkyl,—C(═O)O—C₁₋₄ alkyl, —C(═O)NH₂, —NHC(═O)H, —NHC(═O)—(C₁₋₄ alkyl), C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, and C₁₋₄haloalkoxy;

or R⁹ and the adjacent R¹⁰ together with the two ring atoms on ringQ^(1a) to which they are attached form a fused benzene ring or a fused5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3,4, or 5 independently selected R^(10a);

each R^(10a) is independently selected from the group consisting ofhalogen, —OH, —C(═O)OH, —C(═O)—C₁₋₄ alkyl, —C(═O)—NH₂, —C(═O)—N(C₁₋₄alkyl)₂, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄ hydroxylalkyl, C₁₋₄haloalkyl, and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy; and

m is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein Q¹ is Moiety M¹ andZ¹ is C.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein Q¹ is Moiety M¹ andZ¹ is N.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein Q¹ or ring Q^(1a)(when Q¹ is Moiety M¹) is an optionally substituted N-containing6-membered heteroaryl. In a further embodiment, each of the ring-formingatoms of the 6-membered heteroaryl is independently selected from N andC.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein Q¹ or ring Q^(1a)(when Q¹ is Moiety M¹) is an optionally substituted pyridinyl,pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, or pyrazinyl. In a further embodiment, Q¹ orring Q^(1a) is optionally substituted pyrimidinyl. In a furtherembodiment, Q¹ or ring Q^(1a) is pyrimidinyl substituted with 1 or 2C₁₋₄ alkyl (e.g., CH₃).

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein Q¹ is Moiety M¹ thatis selected from the group consisting of quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl,1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridinyl, imidazo[1,2-a]pyridinyl,1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridinyl, imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazinyl,imidazo[2,1-c][1,2,4]triazinyl, imidazo[1,5-a]pyrazinyl,imidazo[1,2-a]pyrimidinyl, 1H-indazolyl, 9H-purinyl,[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrimidinyl, isoxazolo[5,4-c]pyridazinyl,isoxazolo[3,4-c]pyridazinyl, and [1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-b]pyridazinyl, eachoptionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 R¹⁰ and further optionallysubstituted with 1 or 2 R^(10a); or wherein Moiety M¹ is selected fromthe group consisting of pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, pyridinyl, pyridazinyl,1H-pyrazolyl, 1H-pyrrolyl, 4H-pyrazolyl, 1H-imidazolyl,3-oxo-2H-pyridazinyl, 1H-2-oxo-pyrimidinyl, 1H-2-oxo-pyridinyl,2,4(1H,3H)-dioxo-pyrimidinyl, and 1H-2-oxo-pyrazinyl, each substitutedwith R⁹ and further optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 R¹⁰.

In a further embodiment, Moiety M¹ is selected from the group consistingof pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, pyridinyl, and pyridazinyl, each substitutedwith R⁹ and further optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 R¹⁰. In a yetfurther embodiment, Moiety M¹ is pyrimidinyl substituted with R⁹ andfurther optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 R¹⁰.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein Q¹ is Moiety M¹ thatis selected from the group consisting of 3-oxo-2H-pyridazinyl,2,4(1H,3H)-dioxo-pyrimidinyl, and 1H-2-oxo-pyrazinyl, each substitutedwith R⁹ and further optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 R¹⁰.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein:

Q¹ is Moiety M¹ that is

R^(10a) is C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, or C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl; and t is 0 or1.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein Q¹ is Moiety M¹ thatis

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein Q¹ is

In a further embodiment, Q¹ is

In a yet further embodiment, Q¹ is 4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein:

Q¹ is Moiety M¹ that is

R¹ is H, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, or C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl. In a furtherembodiment, each of R⁹ and R¹⁰ (or R¹¹) is independently C₁₋₄ alkyl(e.g., CH₃).

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein Q¹ is3-oxo-4,6-dimethyl-(2H)pyridazin-5-yl.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein Q¹ is2-oxo-1,5-dimethyl-(1H)pyrazin-6-yl.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein Q¹ is2,4-dioxo-1,5-dimethyl-(1H,3H)pyrimidin-6-yl.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein R⁹ is C₁₋₄ alkyl or—CN. In a further embodiment, R⁹ is methyl, ethyl, or —CN. In a yetfurther embodiment, R⁹ is methyl or —CN. In a still further embodiment,R⁹ is methyl.

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein each R¹⁰ isindependently selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄haloalkyl, —CN, and —N(R⁵)(R⁶), wherein each of R⁵ and R⁶ isindependently H or is selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkyl,C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, and C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl; or R⁵ and R⁶ together with the Natom to which they are attached form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkylor a 5-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3substituents each independently selected from the group consisting ofhalogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl,and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy. In a further embodiment, each R¹⁰ is independentlyselected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, and —N(R⁵)(R⁶),wherein R⁵ and R⁶ together with the N atom to which they are attachedform azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, or piperidinyl, each optionallysubstituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents each independently selectedfrom the group consisting of halogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₃₋₆cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy. In a yet furtherembodiment, each R¹⁰ is independently selected from the group consistingof methyl, ethyl, and azetidin-1-yl, wherein the azetidin-1-Y1 isoptionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3, halogen (e.g., F).

An embodiment of the present invention is a compound of Formula I(including a compound of Formula Ia or Ib) wherein each R¹⁰ isindependently C₁₋₄ alkyl. In a further embodiment, each R¹⁰ is methyl.

In one embodiment, the invention also provides one or more of thecompounds described as Examples 1-47 in the Examples section of thesubject application, N-oxides thereof, and pharmaceutically acceptablesalts of the compounds or the N-oxides.

Another embodiment of the invention relates to a compound selected fromthe group consisting of:

-   4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-fluorophenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine;-   (+)-4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one;-   (−)-4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one;-   4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine;-   4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine;-   4,6-dimethyl-5-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one;-   (−)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione;-   4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one,    ENT-1;-   4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one,    ENT-2-   4-[4-(4,6-dimethyl-1-oxidopyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine;-   6-methyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine;-   4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)phenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine;-   2-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-5-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)benzonitrile;-   4-[3-chloro-4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)phenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine;-   (−)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrazin-2(1H)-one;-   4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-fluorophenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine;-   4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methoxyphenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine;-   4-[3-chloro-4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)phenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine;-   (+)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrazin-2(1H)-one;-   4,6-dimethyl-5-[4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one;    and-   1,5-dimethyl-6-[4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione,-   or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

The present invention also provides compositions (e.g., pharmaceuticalcompositions) comprising a compound of Formula I (including an N-oxidethereof or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound or theN-oxide). Accordingly, in one embodiment, the invention provides apharmaceutical composition comprising (a therapeutically effectiveamount of) a compound of Formula I (an N-oxide thereof or apharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound or the N-oxide) andoptionally comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In onefurther embodiment, the invention provides a pharmaceutical compositioncomprising (a therapeutically effective amount of) a compound of FormulaI (an N-oxide thereof or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of thecompound or the N-oxide), optionally comprising a pharmaceuticallyacceptable carrier and, optionally, at least one additional medicinal orpharmaceutical agent (such as an antipsychotic agent oranti-schizophrenia agent described below). In one embodiment, theadditional medicinal or pharmaceutical agent is an anti-schizophreniaagent as described below.

The pharmaceutically acceptable carrier may comprise any conventionalpharmaceutical carrier or excipient. Suitable pharmaceutical carriersinclude inert diluents or fillers, water and various organic solvents(such as hydrates and solvates). The pharmaceutical compositions may, ifdesired, contain additional ingredients such as flavorings, binders,excipients and the like. Thus for oral administration, tabletscontaining various excipients, such as citric acid, may be employedtogether with various disintegrants such as starch, alginic acid andcertain complex silicates and with binding agents such as sucrose,gelatin and acacia. Additionally, lubricating agents such as magnesiumstearate, sodium lauryl sulfate and talc are often useful for tabletingpurposes. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed insoft and hard filled gelatin capsules. Non-limiting examples ofmaterials, therefore, include lactose or milk sugar and high molecularweight polyethylene glycols. When aqueous suspensions or elixirs aredesired for oral administration, the active compound therein may becombined with various sweetening or flavoring agents, coloring mattersor dyes and, if desired, emulsifying agents or suspending agents,together with diluents such as water, ethanol, propylene glycol,glycerin, or combinations thereof.

The pharmaceutical composition may, for example, be in a form suitablefor oral administration as a tablet, capsule, pill, powder, sustainedrelease formulation, solution or suspension, for parenteral injection asa sterile solution, suspension or emulsion, for topical administrationas an ointment or cream or for rectal administration as a suppository.

Exemplary parenteral administration forms include solutions orsuspensions of active compounds in sterile aqueous solutions, forexample, aqueous propylene glycol or dextrose solutions. Such dosageforms may be suitably buffered, if desired.

The pharmaceutical composition may be in unit dosage forms suitable forsingle administration of precise dosages. One of ordinary skill in theart would appreciate that the composition may be formulated insub-therapeutic dosage such that multiple doses are envisioned.

In one embodiment the composition comprises a therapeutically effectiveamount of a compound of Formula I (or an N-oxide thereof or apharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound or the N-oxide) and apharmaceutically acceptable carrier.

Compounds of Formula I (including N-oxides thereof and pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts of the compounds or the N-oxides) are D1 modulators. Insome embodiments, a compound of Formula I is a D1 agonist [i.e., binding(having affinity for) and activating D1 receptors]. In some embodiments,using dopamine as a reference full D1 agonist, a compound of Formula Iis a superagonist (i.e., a compound that is capable of producing agreater maximal response than the endogenous D1 agonist, dopamine, for aD1 receptor, and thus exhibiting an efficacy of more than about 100%,for example 120%). In some embodiments, using dopamine as a referencefull agonist, a compound of Formula I is a full D1 agonist (i.e., havingan efficacy of about 100%, for example, 90%-100%, compared to that ofdopamine). In some embodiments, using dopamine as a reference full D1agonist, a compound of Formula I is a partial agonist [i.e., a compoundhaving only partial efficacy (i.e., less than 100%, for example 10%-80%or 50%-70%) at a D1 receptor relative to the full agonist, dopamine,although it binds and activates a D1 receptor]. A D1 agonist (includingsuperagonist, full agonist, and partial agonist) can agonize orpartially agonize an activity of D1. In some embodiments, the EC₅₀ of acompound of Formula I with respect to D1 is less than about 10 μM, 5 μM,2 μM, 1 μM, 500 nM, 200 nM, 100 nM, 50, 40, 30, 20, 10, 5, 2, or 1 nM.

The present invention further provides a method for modulating (such asagonizing or partially agonizing) an activity of D1 receptor (either invitro or in vivo), comprising contacting (including incubating) the D1receptor with a compound of Formula I (such as one selected fromExamples 1-47), or an N-oxide thereof or a pharmaceutically acceptablesalt of the compound or the N-oxide.

Another embodiment of the invention includes a method for treating aD1-mediated (or D1-associated) disorder, comprising administering to amammal (e.g., a human) in need thereof an amount of a compound ofFormula I (including a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or anN-oxide of the compound or salt) effective in modulating (e.g.,agonizing or partially agonizing) D1.

The compounds of Formula I used for treatment of a D1-mediated disorderalso include N-oxides thereof or pharmaceutically acceptable salts ofthe compounds or the N-oxides.

D1-mediated (or D1-associated) disorders include neurological disorders[such as Tourette's syndrome; tardive dyskinesia; Parkinson's disease(including e.g., cognitive impairment associated with PD); cognitivedisorders {including amnesia, age-related cognitive decline, dementia[e.g., senile dementia, Alzheimer's-associated dementia, HIV-associateddementia, Huntington's-associated dementia, Lewy body dementia, vasculardementia, frontotemporal dementia, drug-related dementia (for example,dementia associated with pharmacotherapy therapy such as D2 antagonisttherapy)], delirium, and cognitive impairment (e.g., cognitiveimpairment associated with AD or cognitive impairment associated withPD), and mild cognitive impairment}; Huntington's chorea/disease; andrestless leg syndrome (RLS)]; psychiatric disorders [such as cognitiveimpairment (e.g., cognitive impairment associated with schizophrenia orcognitive impairment associated with pharmacotherapy therapy (e.g., D2antagonist therapy)); anxiety (including acute stress disorder,generalized anxiety disorder, social anxiety disorder, panic disorder,post-traumatic stress disorder, and obsessive-compulsive disorder);factitious disorder (including acute hallucinatory mania); impulsecontrol disorders/impulsivity (including compulsive gambling andintermittent explosive disorder); mood disorders (including bipolar Idisorder, bipolar II disorder, mania, mixed affective state, depression{e.g., age-related depression, major depression, chronic depression,seasonal depression, psychotic depression, postpartum depression, andtreatment resistant depression (TRD)}; psychomotor disorders; psychoticdisorders [including schizophrenia (including, for example, cognitiveand negative symptoms in schizophrenia), schizoaffective disorder,schizophreniform, and delusional disorder]; substance abuse and drugdependence (including narcotic dependence, alcoholism, amphetaminedependence, cocaine addiction, nicotine dependence, and drug withdrawalsyndrome); drug abuse relapse, eating disorders (including anorexia,bulimia, binge eating disorder, overeating, hyperphagia, andpagophagia); autism spectrum disorder (e.g., autism); chronic apathy,anhedonia, chronic fatigue, seasonal affective disorder, and pediatricpsychiatric disorders (including attention deficit disorder, attentiondeficit hyperactive disorder (ADHD), conduct disorder, and autism)],endocrine disorders (such as hyperprolactinemia), or other disordersincluding drowsiness, excessive daytime sleepiness, cachexia,inattention, sexual dysfunction (e.g., erectile dysfunction, post-SSRIsexual dysfunction), pain, migraine, systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE),hyperglycemia, atherosclerosis, dislipidemia, obesity, diabetes, sepsis,post-ischemic tubular necrosis, renal failure, hyponatremia, resistantedema, narcolepsy, cardiovascular disease (e.g., hypertension),congestive heart failure, postoperative ocula hypotonia, sleepdisorders, and serotonin syndrome.

Another embodiment of the invention provides a method for treatingneurological disorders [such as Tourette's syndrome; tardive dyskinesia;Parkinson's disease; cognitive disorders {including amnesia, seniledementia, HIV-associated dementia, Alzheimer's-associated dementia,Huntington's-associated dementia, Lewy body dementia, vascular dementia,drug-related dementia (for example, cognitive impairment associated withD2 antagonist therapy), delirium, and mild cognitive impairment)}; RLS;and Huntington's chorea/disease], psychiatric disorders [such as anxiety(including acute stress disorder, generalized anxiety disorder, socialanxiety disorder, panic disorder, post-traumatic stress disorder andobsessive-compulsive disorder); factitious disorder (including acutehallucinatory mania); impulse control disorders/impulsivity (includingcompulsive gambling and intermittent explosive disorder); mood disorders(including bipolar I disorder, bipolar II disorder, mania, mixedaffective state, major depression, chronic depression, seasonaldepression, psychotic depression, and postpartum depression);psychomotor disorders; psychotic disorders (including schizophrenia,schizoaffective disorder, schizophreniform, and delusional disorder);drug dependence (including narcotic dependence, alcoholism, amphetaminedependence, cocaine addiction, nicotine dependence, and drug withdrawalsyndrome); eating disorders (including anorexia, bulimia, binge eatingdisorder, hyperphagia, and pagophagia); and pediatric psychiatricdisorders (including attention deficit disorder, attentiondeficit/hyperactive disorder, conduct disorder, and autism)], orendocrine disorders (such as hyperprolactinemia) in a mammal, forexample a human, comprising administering to said mammal atherapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I.

Another embodiment of the invention includes a method for treating adisorder in a mammal (e.g., a human), which method comprisesadministering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of acompound of Formula I, wherein the disorder is selected fromschizophrenia (e.g., cognitive and negative symptoms in schizophrenia),cognitive impairment [e.g., cognitive impairment associated withschizophrenia, cognitive impairment associated with AD, cognitiveimpairment associated with PD, cognitive impairment associated withpharmacotherapy therapy (e.g., D2 antagonist therapy), and mildcognitive impairment], attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD),impulsivity, compulsive gambling, an eating disorder (e.g., anorexia,bulimia, binge eating disorder, overeating, hyperphagia, andpagophagia), autism spectrum disorder, mild cognitive impairment (MCI),age-related cognitive decline, dementia (e.g., senile dementia,HIV-associated dementia, Alzheimer's dementia, Lewy body dementia,vascular dementia, or frontotemporal dementia), restless leg syndrome(RLS), Parkinson's disease, Huntington's chorea, anxiety, depression(e.g., age-related depression), major depressive disorder (MDD),treatment resistant depression (TRD), bipolar disorder, chronic apathy,anhedonia, chronic fatigue, post-traumatic stress disorder, seasonalaffective disorder, social anxiety disorder, post-partum depression,serotonin syndrome, substance abuse and drug dependence, drug abuserelapse, Tourette's syndrome, tardive dyskinesia, drowsiness, excessivedaytime sleepiness, cachexia, inattention, sexual dysfunction (e.g.,erectile dysfunction or post-SSRI sexual dysfunction), migraine,systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE), hyperglycemia, atherosclerosis,dislipidemia, obesity, diabetes, sepsis, post-ischemic tubular necrosis,renal failure, hyponatremia, resistant edema, narcolepsy, hypertension,congestive heart failure, postoperative ocular hypotonia, sleepdisorders, and pain.

Another embodiment of the invention includes a method for treatingschizophrenia (e.g., cognitive and negative symptoms in schizophrenia orcognitive impairment associated with schizophrenia) or psychosis in amammal, for example a human, comprising administering to said mammal(e.g., a human) a therapeutically effective amount of a compound ofFormula I.

Another embodiment of the invention includes a method for treatingschizophrenia (e.g., cognitive and negative symptoms in schizophrenia orcognitive impairment associated with schizophrenia) in a mammal, forexample a human, comprising administering to said mammal atherapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I.

Another embodiment of the invention includes a method for the treatmentof cognitive impairment [e.g., cognitive impairment associated withschizophrenia, cognitive impairment associated with AD, or cognitiveimpairment associated with PD] in a mammal, for example a human,comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutically effectiveamount of a compound of Formula I.

Another embodiment of the invention includes a method for treating AD(e.g., treating cognitive impairment associated with AD), PD (e.g.,treating cognitive impairment associated with PD), RLS, depression, orMDD in a mammal, for example a human, comprising administering to saidmammal a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I.

The term “therapeutically effective amount” as used herein refers tothat amount of the compound (including a pharmaceutically acceptablesalt thereof or an N-oxide of the compound or salt) being administeredwhich will relieve to some extent one or more of the symptoms of thedisorder being treated. In reference to the treatment of a D1-mediateddisorder (e.g., schizophrenia), a therapeutically effective amountrefers to that amount which has the effect of relieving to some extent(or, for example, eliminating) one or more symptoms associated with aD1-mediated disorder (e.g., schizophrenia, or cognitive and negativesymptoms in schizophrenia, or cognitive impairment associated withschizophrenia).

The term “treating”, as used herein, unless otherwise indicated, meansreversing, alleviating, inhibiting the progress of, or preventing thedisorder or condition to which such term applies, or one or moresymptoms of such disorder or condition. The term “treatment”, as usedherein, unless otherwise indicated, refers to the act of treating as“treating” is defined herein. The term “treating” also includes adjuvantand neo-adjuvant treatment of a subject.

Administration of the compounds of Formula I may be effected by anymethod that enables delivery of the compounds to the site of action.These methods include oral routes, intranasal routes, inhaled routes,intraduodenal routes, parenteral injection (including intravenous,subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravascular or infusion), topical, andrectal administration.

In one embodiment of the present invention, the compounds of Formula Imay be administered/effected by oral routes.

Dosage regimens may be adjusted to provide the optimum desired response.For example, a single bolus may be administered, several divided dosesmay be administered over time or the dose may be proportionally reducedor increased as indicated by the exigencies of the therapeuticsituation. It may be advantageous to formulate parenteral compositionsin dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage.Dosage unit form, as used herein, refers to physically discrete unitssuited as unitary dosages for the mammalian subjects to be treated; eachunit containing a predetermined quantity of active compound calculatedto produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with therequired pharmaceutical carrier. The specifications for the dosage unitforms of the invention are dictated by a variety of factors such as theunique characteristics of the therapeutic agent and the particulartherapeutic or prophylactic effect to be achieved. In one embodiment ofthe present invention, the compounds of Formula I may be used to treathumans.

It is to be noted that dosage values may vary with the type and severityof the condition to be alleviated, and may include single or multipledoses. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject,specific dosage regimens should be adjusted over time according to theindividual need and the professional judgment of the personadministering or supervising the administration of the compositions, andthat dosage ranges set forth herein are exemplary only and are notintended to limit the scope or practice of the claimed composition. Forexample, doses may be adjusted based on pharmacokinetic orpharmacodynamic parameters, which may include clinical effects such astoxic effects and/or laboratory values. Thus, the present inventionencompasses intra-patient dose-escalation as determined by the skilledartisan. Determining appropriate dosages and regimens for administrationof the chemotherapeutic agent is well-known in the relevant art andwould be understood to be encompassed by the skilled artisan onceprovided the teachings disclosed herein.

The amount of the compound of Formula I administered will be dependenton the subject being treated, the severity of the disorder or condition,the rate of administration, the disposition of the compound and thediscretion of the prescribing physician. Generally, an effective dosageis in the range of about 0.0001 to about 50 mg per kg body weight perday, for example about 0.01 to about 10 mg/kg/day, in single or divideddoses. For a 70 kg human, this would amount to about 0.007 mg to about3500 mg/day, for example about 0.7 mg to about 700 mg/day. In someinstances, dosage levels below the lower limit of the aforesaid rangemay be more than adequate, while in other cases still larger doses maybe employed without causing any harmful side effect, provided that suchlarger doses are first divided into several small doses foradministration throughout the day.

As used herein, the term “combination therapy” refers to theadministration of a compound of Formula I together with an at least oneadditional pharmaceutical or medicinal agent (e.g., ananti-schizophrenia agent), either sequentially or simultaneously.

The present invention includes the use of a combination of a compound ofFormula I and one or more additional pharmaceutically active agent(s).If a combination of active agents is administered, then they may beadministered sequentially or simultaneously, in separate dosage forms orcombined in a single dosage form. Accordingly, the present inventionalso includes pharmaceutical compositions comprising an amount of: (a) afirst agent comprising a compound of Formula I (including an N-oxidethereof or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound or theN-oxide); (b) a second pharmaceutically active agent; and (c) apharmaceutically acceptable carrier, vehicle or diluent.

Various pharmaceutically active agents may be selected for use inconjunction with the compounds of Formula I, depending on the disease,disorder, or condition to be treated. Pharmaceutically active agentsthat may be used in combination with the compositions of the presentinvention include, without limitation:

(i) acetylcholinesterase inhibitors such as donepezil hydrochloride(ARICEPT, MEMAC); or Adenosine A_(2A) receptor antagonists such asPreladenant (SCH 420814) or SCH 412348;

(ii) amyloid-β (or fragments thereof), such as Aβ₁₋₁₅ conjugated to panHLA DR-binding epitope (PADRE) and ACC-001 (Elan/Wyeth;

(iii) antibodies to amyloid-β (or fragments thereof), such asbapineuzumab (also known as AAB-001) and AAB-002 (Wyeth/Elan);

(iv) amyloid-lowering or -inhibiting agents (including those that reduceamyloid production, accumulation and fibrillization) such as colostrininand bisnorcymserine (also known as BNC);

(v) alpha-adrenergic receptor agonists such as clonidine (CATAPRES);

(vi) beta-adrenergic receptor blocking agents (beta blockers) such ascarteolol;

(vii) anticholinergics such as amitriptyline (ELAVIL, ENDEP);

(viii) anticonvulsants such as carbamazepine (TEGRETOL, CARBATROL);

(ix) antipsychotics, such as lurasidone (also known as SM-13496;Dainippon Sumitomo);

(x) calcium channel blockers such as nilvadipine (ESCOR, NIVADIL);

(xi) catechol O-methyltransferase (COMT) inhibitors such as tolcapone(TASMAR);

(xii) central nervous system stimulants such as caffeine;

(xiii) corticosteroids such as prednisone (STERAPRED, DELTASONE);

(xiv) dopamine receptor agonists such as apomorphine (APOKYN);

(xv) dopamine receptor antagonists such as tetrabenazine (NITOMAN,XENAZINE, dopamine D2 antagonist such as Quetiapine);

(xvi) dopamine reuptake inhibitors such as nomifensine maleate(MERITAL);

(xvii) gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA) receptor agonists such as baclofen(LIORESAL, KEMSTRO);

(xviii) histamine 3 (H₃) antagonists such as ciproxifan;

(xix) immunomodulators such as glatiramer acetate (also known ascopolymer-1; COPAXONE);

(xx) immunosuppressants such as methotrexate (TREXALL, RHEUMATREX);

(xxi) interferons, including interferon beta-1a (AVONEX, REBIF) andinterferon beta-1b (BETASERON, BETAFERON);

(xxii) levodopa (or its methyl or ethyl ester), alone or in combinationwith a DOPA decarboxylase inhibitor (e.g., carbidopa (SINEMET, CARBILEV,PARCOPA));

(xxiii) N-methyl-D-aspartate (NMDA) receptor antagonists such asmemantine (NAMENDA, AXURA, EBIXA);

(xxiv) monoamine oxidase (MAO) inhibitors such as selegiline (EMSAM);

(xxv) muscarinic receptor (particularly M1 subtype) agonists such asbethanechol chloride (DUVOID, URECHOLINE);

(xxvi) neuroprotective drugs such as2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-1H-carbazol-3-one oxime;

(xxvii) nicotinic receptor agonists such as epibatidine;

(xxviii) norepinephrine (noradrenaline) reuptake inhibitors such asatomoxetine (STRATTERA);

(xxix) phosphodiesterase (PDE) inhibitors, for example, PDE9 inhibitorssuch as BAY 73-6691 (Bayer AG) and PDE 10 (e.g. PDE10A) inhibitors suchas papaverine;

(xxx) other PDE inhibitors including (a) PDE1 inhibitors (e.g.,vinpocetine), (b) PDE2 inhibitors (e.g.,erythro-9-(2-hydroxy-3-nonyl)adenine (EHNA)), (c) PDE4 inhibitors (e.g.,rolipram), and (d) PDE5 inhibitors (e.g., sildenafil (VIAGRA, REVATIO));

(xxxi) quinolines such as quinine (including its hydrochloride,dihydrochloride, sulfate, bisulfate and gluconate salts);

(xxxii) β-secretase inhibitors such as WY-25105;

(xxxiii) γ-secretase inhibitors such as LY-411575 (Lilly);

(xxxiv) serotonin (5-hydroxytryptamine) 1A (5-HT_(1A)) receptorantagonists such as spiperone;

(xxxv) serotonin (5-hydroxytryptamine) 4 (5-HT₄) receptor agonists suchas PRX-03140 (Epix);

(xxxvi) serotonin (5-hydroxytryptamine) 6 (5-HT₆) receptor antagonistssuch as mianserin (TORVOL, BOLVIDON, NORVAL);

(xxxvii) serotonin (5-HT) reuptake inhibitors such as alaproclate,citalopram (CELEXA, CIPRAMIL);

(xxxviii) trophic factors, such as nerve growth factor (NGF), basicfibroblast growth factor (bFGF; ERSOFERMIN), neurotrophin-3 (NT-3),cardiotrophin-1, brain-derived neurotrophic factor (BDNF), neublastin,meteorin, and glial-derived neurotrophic factor (GDNF), and agents thatstimulate production of trophic factors, such as propentofylline;

and the like.

The compound of Formula I is optionally used in combination with anotheractive agent. Such an active agent may be, for example, an atypicalantipsychotic or an anti-Parkinson's disease agent or ananti-Alzheimer's agent. Accordingly, another embodiment of the inventionprovides methods of treating a D1-mediated disorder (e.g., aneurological and psychiatric disorder associated with D1), comprisingadministering to a mammal an effective amount of a compound of Formula I(including an N-oxide thereof or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt ofthe compound or the N-oxide) and further comprising administeringanother active agent.

As used herein, the term “another active agent” refers to anytherapeutic agent, other than the compound of Formula I (including anN-oxide thereof or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound orthe N-oxide) that is useful for the treatment of a subject disorder.Examples of additional therapeutic agents include antidepressants,antipsychotics (such as anti-schizophrenia), anti-pain, anti-Parkinson'sdisease agents, anti-LID (levodopa-induced dyskinesia), anti-Alzheimer'sand anti-anxiety agents. Examples of particular classes ofantidepressants that can be used in combination with the compounds ofthe invention include norepinephrine reuptake inhibitors, selectiveserotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs), NK-1 receptor antagonists,monoamine oxidase inhibitors (MAOIs), reversible inhibitors of monoamineoxidase (RIMAs), serotonin and noradrenaline reuptake inhibitors(SNRIs), corticotropin releasing factor (CRF) antagonists,α-adrenoreceptor antagonists, and atypical antidepressants. Suitablenorepinephrine reuptake inhibitors include tertiary amine tricyclics andsecondary amine tricyclics. Examples of suitable tertiary aminetricyclics and secondary amine tricyclics include amitriptyline,clomipramine, doxepin, imipramine, trimipramine, dothiepin,butriptyline, iprindole, lofepramine, nortriptyline, protriptyline,amoxapine, desipramine and maprotiline. Examples of suitable selectiveserotonin reuptake inhibitors include fluoxetine, fluvoxamine,paroxetine, and sertraline. Examples of monoamine oxidase inhibitorsinclude isocarboxazid, phenelzine, and tranylcyclopramine. Examples ofsuitable reversible inhibitors of monoamine oxidase include moclobemide.Examples of suitable serotonin and noradrenaline reuptake inhibitors ofuse in the present invention include venlafaxine. Examples of suitableatypical anti-depressants include bupropion, lithium, nefazodone,trazodone and viloxazine. Examples of anti-Alzheimer's agents includeDimebon, NMDA receptor antagonists such as memantine; and cholinesteraseinhibitors such as donepezil and galantamine. Examples of suitableclasses of anti-anxiety agents that can be used in combination with thecompounds of the invention include benzodiazepines and serotonin 1A(5-HT1A) agonists or antagonists, especially 5-HT1A partial agonists,and corticotropin releasing factor (CRF) antagonists. Suitablebenzodiazepines include alprazolam, chlordiazepoxide, clonazepam,chlorazepate, diazepam, halazepam, lorazepam, oxazepam, and prazepam.Suitable 5-HT1A receptor agonists or antagonists include buspirone,flesinoxan, gepirone, and ipsapirone. Suitable atypical antipsychoticsinclude paliperidone, bifeprunox, ziprasidone, risperidone,aripiprazole, olanzapine, and quetiapine. Suitable nicotineacetylcholine agonists include ispronicline, varenicline and MEM 3454.Anti-pain agents include pregabalin, gabapentin, clonidine, neostigmine,baclofen, midazolam, ketamine and ziconotide. Examples of suitableanti-Parkinson's disease agents include L-DOPA (or its methyl or ethylester), a DOPA decarboxylase inhibitor (e.g., carbidopa (SINEMET,CARBILEV, PARCOPA), an Adenosine A_(2A) receptor antagonist [e.g.,Preladenant (SCH 420814) or SCH 412348], benserazide (MADOPAR),α-methyldopa, monofluoromethyldopa, difluoromethyldopa, brocresine, orm-hydroxybenzylhydrazine), a dopamine agonist [such as apomorphine(APOKYN), bromocriptine (PARLODEL), cabergoline (DOSTINEX),dihydrexidine, dihydroergocryptine, fenoldopam (CORLOPAM), lisuride(DOPERGIN), pergolide (PERMAX), piribedil (TRIVASTAL, TRASTAL),pramipexole (MIRAPEX), quinpirole, ropinirole (REQUIP), rotigotine(NEUPRO), SKF-82958 (GlaxoSmithKline), and sarizotan], a monoamineoxidase (MAO) inhibitor [such as selegiline (EMSAM), selegilinehydrochloride (L-deprenyl, ELDEPRYL, ZELAPAR), dimethylselegilene,brofaromine, phenelzine (NARDIL), tranylcypromine (PARNATE), moclobemide(AURORIX, MANERIX), befloxatone, safinamide, isocarboxazid (MARPLAN),nialamide (NIAMID), rasagiline (AZILECT), iproniazide (MARSILID,IPROZID, IPRONID), CHF-3381 (Chiesi Farmaceutici), iproclozide,toloxatone (HUMORYL, PERENUM), bifemelane, desoxypeganine, harmine (alsoknown as telepathine or banasterine), harmaline, linezolid (ZYVOX,ZYVOXID), and pargyline (EUDATIN, SUPIRDYL)], a catecholO-methyltransferase (COMT) inhibitor [such as tolcapone (TASMAR),entacapone (COMTAN), and tropolone], an N-methyl-D-aspartate (NMDA)receptor antagonist [such as amantadine (SYMMETREL)], anticholinergics[such as amitriptyline (ELAVIL, ENDEP), butriptyline, benztropinemesylate (COGENTIN), trihexyphenidyl (ARTANE), diphenhydramine(BENADRYL), orphenadrine (NORFLEX), hyoscyamine, atropine (ATROPEN),scopolamine (TRANSDERM-SCOP), scopolamine methylbromide (PARMINE),dicycloverine (BENTYL, BYCLOMINE, DIBENT, DILOMINE, tolterodine(DETROL), oxybutynin (DITROPAN, LYRINEL XL, OXYTROL), penthienatebromide, propantheline (PRO-BANTHINE), cyclizine, imipraminehydrochloride (TOFRANIL), imipramine maleate (SURMONTIL), lofepramine,desipramine (NORPRAMIN), doxepin (SINEQUAN, ZONALON), trimipramine(SURMONTIL), and glycopyrrolate (ROBINUL)], or a combination thereof.Examples of anti-schizophrenia agents include ziprasidone, risperidone,olanzapine, quetiapine, aripiprazole, asenapine, blonanserin, oriloperidone.

As noted above, the compounds of Formula I (including N-oxides thereofand pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds or salts) may beused in combination with one or more additional anti-schizophreniaagents which are described herein. When a combination therapy is used,the one or more additional anti-schizophrenia agents may be administeredsequentially or simultaneously with the compound of the invention. Inone embodiment, the additional anti-schizophrenia agent is administeredto a mammal (e.g., a human) prior to administration of the compound ofthe invention. In another embodiment, the additional anti-schizophreniaagent is administered to the mammal after administration of the compoundof the invention. In another embodiment, the additionalanti-schizophrenia agent is administered to the mammal (e.g., a human)simultaneously with the administration of the compound of the invention(or an N-oxide thereof or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of theforegoing).

The invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition for thetreatment of schizophrenia in a mammal, including a human, whichcomprises an amount of a compound of Formula I (or an N-oxide thereof ora pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the foregoing), as defined above(including hydrates, solvates and polymorphs of said compound orpharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof), in combination with one ormore (for example one to three) anti-schizophrenia agents such asziprasidone, risperidone, olanzapine, quetiapine, aripiprazole,asenapine, blonanserin, or iloperidone, wherein the amounts of theactive agent and the combination when taken as a whole aretherapeutically effective for treating schizophrenia.

The invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition for thetreatment of Parkinson's disease in a mammal (including cognitionimpairment associated with PD), including a human, which comprises anamount of a compound of Formula I (or an N-oxide thereof or apharmaceutically acceptable salt of the foregoing), as defined above(including hydrates, solvates and polymorphs of said compound orpharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof), in combination with one ormore (for example one to three) anti-Parkinson's disease agents such asL-DOPA, wherein the amounts of the active agent and the combination whentaken as a whole are therapeutically effective for treating Parkinson'sdisease.

It will be understood that the compounds of Formula I depicted above arenot limited to the particular enantiomer shown, but also include allstereoisomers and mixtures thereof.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

Compounds of the invention, including N-oxides and salts of thecompounds or N-oxides, can be prepared using known organic synthesistechniques and can be synthesized according to any of numerous possiblesynthetic routes.

The reactions for preparing compounds of the invention can be carriedout in suitable solvents, which can be readily selected by one of skillin the art of organic synthesis. Suitable solvents can be substantiallynon-reactive with the starting materials (reactants), the intermediates,or products at the temperatures at which the reactions are carried out,i.e., temperatures that can range from the solvent's freezingtemperature to the solvent's boiling temperature. A given reaction canbe carried out in one solvent or a mixture of more than one solvent.Depending on the particular reaction step, suitable solvents for aparticular reaction step can be selected by the skilled artisan.

Preparation of compounds of the invention can involve the protection anddeprotection of various chemical groups. The need for protection anddeprotection, and the selection of appropriate protecting groups, can bereadily determined by one skilled in the art. The chemistry ofprotecting groups can be found, for example, in T. W. Greene and P. G.M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3^(rd) Ed., Wiley &Sons, Inc., New York (1999), which is incorporated herein by referencein its entirety.

Reactions can be monitored according to any suitable method known in theart. For example, product formation can be monitored by spectroscopicmeans, such as nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy (e.g., ¹H or¹³C), infrared spectroscopy, spectrophotometry (e.g., UV-visible), massspectrometry, or by chromatographic methods such as high performanceliquid chromatography (HPLC) or thin layer chromatography (TLC).

Compounds of Formula I and intermediates thereof may be preparedaccording to the following reaction schemes and accompanying discussion.Unless otherwise indicated, R¹, R², R³, R⁴, R⁵, R⁶, R⁷, R⁸, R⁹, R¹⁰,R¹¹, T¹, T², T³, Q¹, and X¹, and structural Formula I in the reactionschemes and discussion that follow are as defined above. In general thecompounds of this invention may be made by processes which includeprocesses analogous to those known in the chemical arts, particularly inlight of the description contained herein. Certain processes for themanufacture of the compounds of this invention and intermediates thereofare provided as further features of the invention and are illustrated bythe following reaction schemes. Other processes are described in theexperimental section. The schemes and examples provided herein(including the corresponding description) are for illustration only, andnot intended to limit the scope of the present invention.

Scheme 1 refers to preparation of compounds of Formula I. Referring toScheme 1, compounds of Formula 1-1 [where Lg¹ is a suitable leavinggroup such as halo (e.g., Cl or Br) and Pg¹ is a suitable protectinggroup, such as tert-butoxycarbonyl (Boc),[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl (SEM), or 2-tetrahydropyranyl (THP)]and 1-2 [wherein Z¹ is a halogen (Cl, Br, or I)] are commerciallyavailable or can be made by methods described herein or other methodswell known to those skilled in the art. A compound of Formula 1-3 can beprepared by coupling a compound of Formula 1-1 with a compound ofFormula 1-2 under suitable conditions. The coupling can be accomplished,for example, by heating a mixture of a compound of Formula 1-1 with acompound of Formula 1-2 in the presence of a base, such as Cs₂CO₃, in anappropriate solvent, such as DMSO. Alternatively, a metal-catalyzed(such as using a palladium or copper catalyst) coupling may be employedto accomplish the aforesaid coupling. In this variant of the coupling, amixture of a compound of Formula 1-1 and a compound of Formula 1-2 canbe heated in the presence of a base (such as Cs₂CO₃), a metal catalyst[such as a palladium catalyst, e.g., [Pd(OAc)₂], and a ligand (such asBINAP) in an appropriate solvent, such as 1,4-dioxane. A compound ofFormula 1-3 can subsequently be reacted with a compound of Formula Q¹-Z²[wherein Z² can be Br; B(OH)₂; B(OR)₂ wherein each R is independently Hor C₁₋₆ alkyl, or wherein the two (OR) groups, together with the B atomto which they are attached, form a 5- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl orheteroaryl optionally substituted with one or more C₁₋₆ alkyl; atrialkyltin moiety; or the like] by a metal-catalyzed (such as using apalladium catalyst) coupling reaction to obtain a compound of Formula I.Compounds of Formula Q¹-Z² are commercially available or can be made bymethods described herein or by methods analogous to those described inthe chemical art. Alternatively, a compound of Formula 1-3 can beconverted to a compound of Formula 1-4 (wherein Z² is defined as above).For example, a compound of Formula 1-3 (wherein Z¹ is halogen such asBr) can be converted to a compound of Formula 1-4 [wherein Z² is B(OH)₂;B(OR)₂ wherein each R is independently H or C₁₋₆ alkyl, or wherein thetwo (OR) groups, together with the B atom to which they are attached,form a 5- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl or heteroaryl optionallysubstituted with one or more C₁₋₆ alkyl] by methods described herein orother methods well known to those skilled in the art. In this example,this reaction can be accomplished, for example, by reacting a compoundof Formula 1-3 (wherein Z¹ is halogen such as Br) with4,4,4′,4′,5,5,5′,5′-octamethyl-2,2′-bi-1,3,2-dioxaborolane, a suitablebase (such as potassium acetate), and a palladium catalyst {such as[1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II)} in asuitable solvent such as 1,4-dioxane. In another example, a compound ofFormula 1-3 (wherein Z¹ is halogen such as Br) can be converted to acompound of Formula 1-4 (wherein Z² is a trialkyltin moiety) byalternate methods described herein or other methods well known to thoseskilled in the art. In this example, this reaction can be accomplished,for example, by reacting a compound of Formula 1-3 (wherein Z¹ ishalogen such as Br) with a hexaalkyldistannane (such ashexamethyldistannane) in the presence of a palladium catalyst [such astetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0)] in a suitable solvent such as1,4-dioxane. A compound of Formula 1-4 can then be reacted with acompound of Formula Q¹-Z¹ (wherein Z¹ is defined as above) by ametal-catalyzed (such as using a palladium catalyst) coupling reactionto obtain a compound of Formula I. Compounds of Formula Q¹-Z¹ arecommercially available or can be made by methods described herein or bymethods analogous to those described in the chemical art. The type ofreaction employed depends on the selection of Z¹ and Z². For example,when Z¹ is halogen or triflate and the Q¹-Z² reagent is a boronic acidor boronic ester, a Suzuki reaction may be used [A. Suzuki, J.Organomet. Chem. 1999, 576, 147-168; N. Miyaura and A. Suzuki, Chem.Rev. 1995, 95, 2457-2483; A. F. Littke et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2000,122, 4020-4028]. In some specific embodiments, an aromatic iodide,bromide, or triflate of Formula 1-3 is combined with an aryl orheteroaryl boronic acid or boronic ester of Formula Q¹-Z² and a suitablebase, such as potassium phosphate, in a suitable organic solvent such astetrahydrofuran (THF). A palladium catalyst is added, such as S-Phosprecatalyst {also known aschloro(2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2′,6′-dimethoxy-1,1′-biphenyl)[2-(2-aminoethylphenyl)]palladium(II)-tert-butylmethyl ether adduct}, and the reaction mixture is heated. Alternatively,when Z¹ is halogen or triflate and Z² is trialkyltin, a Stille couplingmay be employed [V. Farina et al., Organic Reactions 1997, 50, 1-652].More specifically, a compound of Formula 1-3 (wherein Z¹ is bromide,iodide, or triflate) may be combined with a compound of Formula Q¹-Z²(wherein the Q¹-Z² compound is a Q¹ stannane compound) in the presenceof a palladium catalyst, such asdichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II), in a suitable organicsolvent such as toluene, and the reaction may be heated. Where Z¹ is Br,I, or triflate and Z² is Br or I, a Negishi coupling may be used [E.Erdik, Tetrahedron 1992, 48, 9577-9648]. More specifically, a compoundof Formula 1-3 (wherein Z¹ is bromide, iodide, or triflate) may betransmetallated by treatment with 1 to 1.1 equivalents of analkyllithium reagent followed by a solution of 1.2 to 1.4 equivalents ofzinc chloride in an appropriate solvent such as THF at a temperatureranging from −80° C. to −65° C. After warming to a temperature between10° C. and 30° C., the reaction mixture may be treated with a compoundof Formula Q¹-Z² (wherein Z² is Br or I), and heated at 50° C. to 70° C.with addition of a catalyst such astetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0). The reaction may be carriedout for times ranging from 1 to 24 hours. The compound of Formula 1-5may then be deprotected, using appropriate conditions depending on theselection of the Pg¹ group, to obtain a compound of Formula I. None ofthese reactions are limited to the employment of the solvent, base,catalyst, or ligand described above, as many other conditions may beused.

Scheme 2 also refers to preparation of compounds of Formula I. Referringto Scheme 2, compounds of Formula I may be prepared utilizing analogouschemical transformations to those described in Scheme 1, but with adifferent ordering of steps. Compounds of Formula 2-1 [wherein Pg² is asuitable protecting group such as methyl, benzyl, THP, ortriisopropylsilyl (TIPS)] are commercially available or can be made bymethods described herein or other methods well known to those skilled inthe art. A compound of Formula 2-1 can be converted to a compound ofFormula 2-2 either directly or after conversion to a compound of Formula2-3 using methods analogous to those described in Scheme 1. A compoundof Formula 2-2 may then be deprotected, using appropriate conditionsdepending on the selection of the Pg² group, to obtain a compound ofFormula 2-4, which in turn can be coupled with a compound of Formula 1-1in Scheme 1 to afford a compound of Formula 1-5. The coupling conditionsemployed may be analogous to those described for the preparation of acompound of Formula 1-3 in Scheme 1. A compound of Formula 1-5 may thenbe deprotected, using appropriate conditions depending on the selectionof the Pg¹ group, to obtain a compound of Formula I.

Scheme 3 refers to a preparation of a compound of Formula 3-3 (whereinA¹ is either Pg² as defined above or a moiety of Formula A^(1a)), whichcan be used in Scheme 2 as intermediate/starting material for thepreparation of compounds of Formula I. Referring to Scheme 3, compoundsof Formula 3-1 are commercially available or can be made by methodsdescribed herein or other methods well known to those skilled in theart. A compound of Formula 3-1 can be reacted with4-chloro-3-nitropyridine and the initial product can be subsequentlyreduced to obtain a compound of Formula 3-2. Examples of suitablereaction conditions for the coupling of a compound of Formula 3-1 with4-chloro-3-nitropyridine include mixing the two reactants with asuitable base, such as triethylamine, in a suitable reaction solventsuch as ethanol. The subsequent reduction of the nitro group to afford acompound of Formula 3-2 can be achieved by, for example, hydrogenationin the presence of a catalyst such as palladium on carbon in a suitablesolvent such as methanol. Suitable hydrogen pressures for the aforesaidreaction are typically between 1 atm and 4 atm. A compound of Formula3-2 can then be heated with acetic anhydride and triethyl orthoformateto obtain a compound of Formula 3-3.

Scheme 4 refers to a preparation of a compound of Formula 4-4 or 4-5(wherein R⁹ is such as C₁₋₃ alkyl, for example methyl), which can beused in Scheme 2 as intermediate/starting material for the preparationof compounds of Formula I. Referring to Scheme 4, compounds of Formula4-1 are commercially available or can be made by methods describedherein or other methods well known to those skilled in the art. Acompound of Formula 4-2 can be prepared by reacting an arylketone ofFormula 4-1 with an alkyl nitrite (e.g., isoamyl nitrite) in thepresence of an acid (such as hydrochloric acid). The resulting oxime ofFormula 4-2 can be converted to the diketone of Formula 4-3 upontreatment with formaldehyde (or its equivalent such as metaformaldehydeor polyformaldehyde) in the presence of an acid (such as an aqueoushydrochloric acid solution). Diketones of Formula 4-3 can be reactedwith glycinamide or a salt thereof (such as an acetic acid salt) in thepresence of a base such as sodium hydroxide to obtain pyrazinones ofFormula 4-4. Alkylation of the pyrazinone nitrogen to obtain a compoundof Formula 4-5 can be achieved by treatment of a compound of Formula 4-4with a base [such as LDA, LHMDS, and the like] and a compound of theformula R¹¹—Z³ [wherein Z³ is an acceptable leaving group such as Cl,Br, I, methanesulfonate, and the like and wherein R¹¹ is for exampleC₁₋₃ alkyl (e.g., methyl)]. Suitable reaction solvents typically can beselected from polar aprotic solvents such as N,N-dimethylformamide(DMF), 1,4-dioxane, or THF.

Alternatively, a compound of Formula 4-5 may be prepared as in Scheme 5[wherein R¹¹ is, for example, H or C₁₋₃ alkyl (e.g., methyl)], which canbe used in Scheme 2 as intermediate/starting material for thepreparation of compounds of Formula I. Referring to Scheme 5, compoundsof Formula 5-1 and 5-2 are commercially available or can be made bymethods described herein or other methods well known to those skilled inthe art. A compound of Formula 5-3 can be prepared by coupling acompound of Formula 5-1 with a compound of Formula 5-2. The aforesaidcoupling may be accomplished by reacting a compound of Formula 5-1 witha compound of Formula 5-2 in the presence of a suitable base (such aspotassium carbonate), a suitable catalyst [such astetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0)], and a suitable solvent (suchas ethanol). A compound of Formula 5-3 can be reacted with maleicanhydride and hydrogen peroxide in a solvent (such as dichloromethane)to provide a compound of Formula 5-4, which may contain a mixture ofN-oxide regioisomers. A compound of Formula 5-5 can be prepared from acompound of Formula 5-4 by heating with acetic anydride; the initialproduct can be saponified using a base (such as NaOH) in a suitablepolar solvent (such as water or methanol). A compound of Formula 4-5 canbe prepared from a compound of Formula 5-5 by reaction with a suitablebase (such as LDA, LHMDS and the like), lithium bromide, and a compoundof the formula R¹¹—Z³ (wherein Z³ is an acceptable leaving group such asCl, Br, I, methanesulfonate, and the like). Suitable reaction solventstypically can be selected from polar aprotic solvents (such as DMF,1,4-dioxane, or THF).

Scheme 6 refers to a preparation of a compound of Formula 6-6 [whereinR^(Y) is H or R¹⁰ (such as C₁₋₃ alkyl, for example methyl) and Pg³ is asuitable protecting group, such as THP], which can be used in Scheme 2as intermediate/starting material for the preparation of compounds ofFormula I. Referring to Scheme 6, compounds of Formula 6-1 and 6-2 arecommercially available or can be made by methods described herein orother methods well known to those skilled in the art. A compound ofFormula 6-3 can be prepared by coupling a compound of Formula 6-1 withan enol triflate of Formula 6-2. The aforesaid coupling may beaccomplished by reacting a compound of Formula 6-1 with a triflate ofFormula 6-2 in the presence of a suitable base (such as potassiumcarbonate), a suitable catalyst [such as palladium(II)acetate], asuitable ligand (such as tricyclohexylphosphine), and optionally asuitable phase transfer catalyst such as tetrabutylammonium chloride.Suitable reaction solvents typically can be selected from polar aproticsolvents such as 1,4-dioxane or THF. A compound of Formula 6-3 can bereacted with 1 to 5 equivalents of a suitable base (such as DBU) underan oxygen atmosphere to obtain a compound of Formula 6-4. Suitablereaction solvents typically can be selected from polar aprotic solventssuch as DMF, 1,4-dioxane, or THF. A compound of Formula 6-5 can beobtained by reacting a compound of Formula 6-4 with hydrazine in asuitable solvent such as 1-butanol. A compound of Formula 6-5 can beconverted to a suitably protected compound of Formula 6-6 using methodsdescribed herein or other methods well known to those skilled in theart.

Scheme 7 refers to a preparation of a compound of Formula 7-6 [whereinR^(Y) is H or R¹⁰ (such as C₁₋₃ alkyl, for example methyl)], which canbe used in Scheme 2 as intermediate/starting material for thepreparation of compounds of Formula I. Referring to Scheme 7, compoundsof Formula 7-1 and 7-2 are commercially available or can be made bymethods described herein or other methods well known to those skilled inthe art. A compound of Formula 7-3 can be prepared by coupling acompound of Formula 7-1 with a compound of Formula 7-2 [wherein Pg⁴ is asuitable protecting group such as THP]. The aforesaid coupling may beaccomplished by heating a compound of Formula 7-1 with a compound ofFormula 7-2 in the presence of a suitable base (such as cesiumcarbonate) and a suitable catalyst {such as[1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II)}. Suitablereaction solvents typically can be selected from polar aprotic solventssuch as 1,4-dioxane or THF. A compound of Formula 7-4 can be obtained byremoving the protecting group Pg⁴, for example, by treating a compoundof Formula 7-3 (wherein Pg⁴ is, for example, THP) with HCl in analcoholic solvent (such as 2-propanol). Treatment of a compound ofFormula 7-4 with phosphorous oxychloride at elevated temperature canprovide a compound of Formula 7-5. A compound of Formula 7-5 can be areactive intermediate in numerous chemical transformations to obtain acompound of Formula 7-6. For example, a compound of Formula 7-5 can bereacted with trimethylaluminum and a suitable palladium catalyst [suchas tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0)] in 1,4-dioxane to afford acompound of Formula 7-6 (wherein the newly introduced R⁹ is methyl).

Scheme 8 refers to a preparation of a compound of Formula 8-3 [whereinR⁹ is for example C₁₋₃ alkyl (e.g., methyl); R¹¹ is for example H orC₁₋₃ alkyl (e.g., methyl); and Pg⁵ is a suitable protecting group [e.g.,SEM, Boc, or benzyloxymethyl acetal (BOM)]; A² is H or Pg²; and Pg² is asuitable protecting group (e.g., methoxymethyl (MOM) or benzyl)], whichcan be used in Scheme 2 as intermediate/starting material for thepreparation of compounds of Formula I. Referring to Scheme 8, compoundsof Formula 8-1 and 8-2 are commercially available or can be prepared bymethods described herein or other methods well known to those skilled inthe art. A compound of Formula 8-3 can be prepared by coupling acompound of Formula 8-1 with a compound of Formula 8-2. The aforesaidcoupling may be accomplished by heating a compound of Formula 8-1 with acompound of Formula 8-2 in the presence of a suitable base (such aspotassium carbonate) and a suitable catalyst {such as[1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II)}.

Alternatively, a compound of Formula I may also be prepared by enzymaticmodification (such as a microbial oxidation) of a related compound ofFormula I. For example, as shown in Scheme 9, incubation of a compoundof Formula I {for example, wherein Q¹ is a moiety that can be oxidized,such as an optionally substituted pyridazinyl in a compound of Formula9-1 [wherein R^(Y) is H or R¹⁰ (such as C₁₋₃ alkyl, for examplemethyl)]} with Pseudomonas putida for a reaction time between 24 and 96hours in a suitable buffer can provide an alternate compound of FormulaI (for example, wherein Q¹ is an optionally substituted pyridazinonyl ina compound of Formula 9-2).

Additional starting materials and intermediates useful for making thecompounds of the present invention can be obtained from chemical vendorssuch as Sigma-Aldrich or can be made according to methods described inthe chemical art.

Those skilled in the art can recognize that in all of the Schemesdescribed herein, if there are functional (reactive) groups present on apart of the compound structure such as a substituent group, for exampleR¹, R², R³, R⁴, R⁵, R⁶, R⁷, R⁸, R⁹, R¹⁰, Q¹, etc., further modificationcan be made if appropriate and/or desired, using methods well known tothose skilled in the art. For example, a —CN group can be hydrolyzed toafford an amide group; a carboxylic acid can be converted to an amide; acarboxylic acid can be converted to an ester, which in turn can bereduced to an alcohol, which in turn can be further modified. Foranother example, an OH group can be converted into a better leavinggroup such as a mesylate, which in turn is suitable for nucleophilicsubstitution, such as by a cyanide ion (CN⁻). For another example, an—S— can be oxidized to —S(═O)— and/or —S(═O)₂—. For yet another example,an unsaturated bond such as C═C or C≡C can be reduced to a saturatedbond by hydrogenation. In some embodiments, a primary amine or asecondary amine moiety (present on a substituent group such as R³, R⁴,R⁹, R¹⁰, etc.) can be converted to an amide, sulfonamide, urea, orthiourea moiety by reacting it with an appropriate reagent such as anacid chloride, a sulfonyl chloride, an isocyanate, or a thioisocyanatecompound. One skilled in the art will recognize further suchmodifications. Thus, a compound of Formula I having a substituent thatcontains a functional group can be converted to another compound ofFormula I having a different substituent group.

Similarly, those skilled in the art can also recognize that in all ofthe schemes described herein, if there are functional (reactive) groupspresent on a substituent group such as R³, R⁴, R⁹, R¹⁰, etc., thesefunctional groups can be protected/deprotected in the course of thesynthetic scheme described here, if appropriate and/or desired. Forexample, an OH group can be protected by a benzyl, methyl, or acetylgroup, which can be deprotected and converted back to the OH group in alater stage of the synthetic process. For another example, an NH₂ groupcan be protected by a benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz) or Boc group; conversionback to the NH₂ group can be carried out at a later stage of thesynthetic process via deprotection.

As used herein, the term “reacting” (or “reaction” or “reacted”) refersto the bringing together of designated chemical reactants such that achemical transformation takes place generating a compound different fromany initially introduced into the system. Reactions can take place inthe presence or absence of solvent.

Compounds of Formula I may exist as stereoisomers, such as atropisomers,racemates, enantiomers, or diastereomers. Conventional techniques forthe preparation/isolation of individual enantiomers include chiralsynthesis from a suitable optically pure precursor or resolution of theracemate using, for example, chiral high pressure liquid chromatography(HPLC). Alternatively, the racemate (or a racemic precursor) may bereacted with a suitable optically active compound, for example, analcohol, or, in the case where the compound contains an acidic or basicmoiety, an acid or base such as tartaric acid or 1-phenylethylamine. Theresulting diastereomeric mixture may be separated by chromatographyand/or fractional crystallization and one or both of thediastereoisomers converted to the corresponding pure enantiomer(s) bymeans well known to one skilled in the art. Chiral compounds of FormulaI (and chiral precursors thereof) may be obtained in enantiomericallyenriched form using chromatography, typically HPLC, on an asymmetricresin with a mobile phase consisting of a hydrocarbon, typically heptaneor hexane, containing from 0% to 50% 2-propanol, typically from 2% to20%, and from 0% to 5% of an alkylamine, typically 0.1% diethylamine.Concentration of the eluate affords the enriched mixture. Stereoisomericconglomerates may be separated by conventional techniques known to thoseskilled in the art. See, e.g., Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds byE. L. Eliel and S. H. Wilen (Wiley, New York, 1994), the disclosure ofwhich is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Suitablestereoselective techniques are well-known to those of ordinary skill inthe art.

Where a compound of Formula I contains an alkenyl or alkenylene(alkylidene) group, geometric cis/trans (or Z/E) isomers are possible.Cis/trans isomers may be separated by conventional techniques well knownto those skilled in the art, for example, chromatography and fractionalcrystallization. Salts of the present invention can be preparedaccording to methods known to those of skill in the art.

The compounds of Formula I that are basic in nature are capable offorming a wide variety of salts with various inorganic and organicacids. Although such salts must be pharmaceutically acceptable foradministration to animals, it is often desirable in practice toinitially isolate the compound of the present invention from thereaction mixture as a pharmaceutically unacceptable salt and then simplyconvert the latter back to the free base compound by treatment with analkaline reagent and subsequently convert the latter free base to apharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt. The acid addition saltsof the basic compounds of this invention can be prepared by treating thebasic compound with a substantially equivalent amount of the selectedmineral or organic acid in an aqueous solvent medium or in a suitableorganic solvent, such as methanol or ethanol. Upon evaporation of thesolvent, the desired solid salt is obtained. The desired acid salt canalso be precipitated from a solution of the free base in an organicsolvent by adding an appropriate mineral or organic acid to thesolution.

If the inventive compound is a base, the desired pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt may be prepared by any suitable method available in theart, for example, treatment of the free base with an inorganic acid,such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid,phosphoric acid and the like, or with an organic acid, such as aceticacid, maleic acid, succinic acid, mandelic acid, fumaric acid, malonicacid, pyruvic acid, oxalic acid, glycolic acid, salicylic acid,isonicotinic acid, lactic acid, pantothenic acid, bitartric acid,ascorbic acid, 2,5-dihydroxybenzoic acid, gluconic acid, saccharic acid,formic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonicacid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, and pamoic [i.e.,4,4′-methanediylbis(3-hydroxynaphthalene-2-carboxylic acid)] acid, apyranosidyl acid, such as glucuronic acid or galacturonic acid, analpha-hydroxy acid, such as citric acid or tartaric acid, an amino acid,such as aspartic acid or glutamic acid, an aromatic acid, such asbenzoic acid or cinnamic acid, a sulfonic acid, such as ethanesulfonicacid, or the like.

Those compounds of Formula I that are acidic in nature are capable offorming base salts with various pharmacologically acceptable cations.Examples of such salts include the alkali metal or alkaline earth metalsalts, and particularly the sodium and potassium salts. These salts areall prepared by conventional techniques. The chemical bases which areused as reagents to prepare the pharmaceutically acceptable base saltsof this invention are those which form non-toxic base salts with theacidic compounds of Formula I. These salts may be prepared by anysuitable method, for example, treatment of the free acid with aninorganic or organic base, such as an amine (primary, secondary ortertiary), an alkali metal hydroxide or alkaline earth metal hydroxide,or the like. These salts can also be prepared by treating thecorresponding acidic compounds with an aqueous solution containing thedesired pharmacologically acceptable cations, and then evaporating theresulting solution to dryness, for example under reduced pressure.Alternatively, they may also be prepared by mixing lower alkanolicsolutions of the acidic compounds and the desired alkali metal alkoxidetogether, and then evaporating the resulting solution to dryness in thesame manner as before. In either case, stoichiometric quantities ofreagents are, for example, employed in order to ensure completeness ofreaction and maximum yields of the desired final product.

Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of compounds of Formula I (includingcompounds of Formula Ia or Ib) may be prepared by one or more of threemethods:

(i) by reacting the compound of Formula I with the desired acid or base;

(ii) by removing an acid- or base-labile protecting group from asuitable precursor of the compound of Formula I or by ring-opening asuitable cyclic precursor, for example, a lactone or lactam, using thedesired acid or base; or

(iii) by converting one salt of the compound of Formula I to another byreaction with an appropriate acid or base or by means of a suitable ionexchange column.

All three reactions are typically carried out in solution. The resultingsalt may precipitate out and be collected by filtration or may berecovered by evaporation of the solvent. The degree of ionization in theresulting salt may vary from completely ionized to almost non-ionized.

Polymorphs can be prepared according to techniques well-known to thoseskilled in the art, for example, by crystallization.

When any racemate crystallizes, crystals of two different types arepossible. The first type is the racemic compound (true racemate)referred to above wherein one homogeneous form of crystal is producedcontaining both enantiomers in equimolar amounts. The second type is theracemic mixture or conglomerate wherein two forms of crystal areproduced in equimolar amounts each comprising a single enantiomer.

While both of the crystal forms present in a racemic mixture may havealmost identical physical properties, they may have different physicalproperties compared to the true racemate. Racemic mixtures may beseparated by conventional techniques known to those skilled in theart—see, for example, Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds by E. L.Eliel and S. H. Wilen (Wiley, New York, 1994).

The invention also includes isotopically labeled compounds of Formula Iwherein one or more atoms is replaced by an atom having the same atomicnumber, but an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic massor mass number usually found in nature. Isotopically labeled compoundsof Formula I (or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof or N-oxidesthereof) can generally be prepared by conventional techniques known tothose skilled in the art or by processes analogous to those describedherein, using an appropriate isotopically labeled reagent in place ofthe non-labeled reagent otherwise employed.

Prodrugs in accordance with the invention can, for example, be producedby replacing appropriate functionalities present in the compounds ofFormula I with certain moieties known to those skilled in the art as‘pro-moieties’ as described, for example, in Design of Prodrugs by H.Bundgaard (Elsevier, 1985).

The compounds of Formula I should be assessed for theirbiopharmaceutical properties, such as solubility and solution stability(across pH), permeability, etc., in order to select the most appropriatedosage form and route of administration for treatment of the proposedindication.

Compounds of the invention intended for pharmaceutical use may beadministered as crystalline or amorphous products. They may be obtained,for example, as solid plugs, powders, or films by methods such asprecipitation, crystallization, freeze drying, spray drying, orevaporative drying. Microwave or radio frequency drying may be used forthis purpose.

They may be administered alone or in combination with one or more othercompounds of the invention or in combination with one or more otherdrugs (or as any combination thereof). Generally, they will beadministered as a formulation in association with one or morepharmaceutically acceptable excipients. The term “excipient” is usedherein to describe any ingredient other than the compound(s) of theinvention. The choice of excipient will to a large extent depend onfactors such as the particular mode of administration, the effect of theexcipient on solubility and stability, and the nature of the dosageform.

Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for the delivery of compounds ofthe present invention (or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof) andmethods for their preparation will be readily apparent to those skilledin the art. Such compositions and methods for their preparation may befound, for example, in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 19th Edition(Mack Publishing Company, 1995).

The compounds of the invention (including pharmaceutically acceptablesalts thereof and N-oxides thereof) may be administered orally. Oraladministration may involve swallowing, so that the compound enters thegastrointestinal tract, and/or buccal, lingual, or sublingualadministration by which the compound enters the blood stream directlyfrom the mouth.

Formulations suitable for oral administration include solid, semi-solidand liquid systems such as tablets; soft or hard capsules containingmulti- or nano-particulates, liquids, or powders; lozenges (includingliquid-filled); chews; gels; fast dispersing dosage forms; films;ovules; sprays; and buccal/mucoadhesive patches.

Liquid formulations include suspensions, solutions, syrups and elixirs.Such formulations may be employed as fillers in soft or hard capsules(made, for example, from gelatin or hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose) andtypically comprise a carrier, for example, water, ethanol, polyethyleneglycol, propylene glycol, methyl cellulose, or a suitable oil, and oneor more emulsifying agents and/or suspending agents. Liquid formulationsmay also be prepared by the reconstitution of a solid, for example, froma sachet.

The compounds of the invention may also be used in fast-dissolving,fast-disintegrating dosage forms such as those described by Liang andChen, Expert Opinion in Therapeutic Patents 2001, 11, 981-986.

For tablet dosage forms, depending on dose, the drug may make up from 1weight % to 80 weight % of the dosage form, more typically from 5 weight% to 60 weight % of the dosage form. In addition to the drug, tabletsgenerally contain a disintegrant. Examples of disintegrants includesodium starch glycolate, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, calciumcarboxymethyl cellulose, croscarmellose sodium, crospovidone,polyvinylpyrrolidone, methyl cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose,lower alkyl-substituted hydroxypropyl cellulose, starch, pregelatinizedstarch and sodium alginate. Generally, the disintegrant will comprisefrom 1 weight % to 25 weight %, for example, from 5 weight % to 20weight % of the dosage form.

Binders are generally used to impart cohesive qualities to a tabletformulation. Suitable binders include microcrystalline cellulose,gelatin, sugars, polyethylene glycol, natural and synthetic gums,polyvinylpyrrolidone, pregelatinized starch, hydroxypropyl cellulose andhydroxypropyl methylcellulose. Tablets may also contain diluents, suchas lactose (monohydrate, spray-dried monohydrate, anhydrous and thelike), mannitol, xylitol, dextrose, sucrose, sorbitol, microcrystallinecellulose, starch and dibasic calcium phosphate dihydrate.

Tablets may also optionally comprise surface active agents, such assodium lauryl sulfate and polysorbate 80, and glidants such as silicondioxide and talc. When present, surface active agents may comprise from0.2 weight % to 5 weight % of the tablet, and glidants may comprise from0.2 weight % to 1 weight % of the tablet.

Tablets also generally contain lubricants such as magnesium stearate,calcium stearate, zinc stearate, sodium stearyl fumarate, and mixturesof magnesium stearate with sodium lauryl sulfate. Lubricants generallycomprise from 0.25 weight % to 10 weight %, for example, from 0.5 weight% to 3 weight % of the tablet.

Other possible ingredients include anti-oxidants, colorants, flavoringagents, preservatives and taste-masking agents.

Exemplary tablets contain up to about 80% drug, from about 10 weight %to about 90 weight % binder, from about 0 weight % to about 85 weight %diluent, from about 2 weight % to about 10 weight % disintegrant, andfrom about 0.25 weight % to about 10 weight % lubricant.

Tablet blends may be compressed directly or by roller to form tablets.Tablet blends or portions of blends may alternatively be wet-, dry-, ormelt-granulated, melt-congealed, or extruded before tabletting. Thefinal formulation may comprise one or more layers and may be coated oruncoated; it may even be encapsulated.

The formulation of tablets is discussed in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms:Tablets, Vol. 1, by H. Lieberman and L. Lachman (Marcel Dekker, NewYork, 1980).

Consumable oral films for human or veterinary use are typically pliablewater-soluble or water-swellable thin film dosage forms which may berapidly dissolving or mucoadhesive and typically comprise a compound ofFormula I, a film-forming polymer, a binder, a solvent, a humectant, aplasticizer, a stabilizer or emulsifier, a viscosity-modifying agent anda solvent. Some components of the formulation may perform more than onefunction.

The compound of Formula I (or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereofor N-oxides thereof) may be water-soluble or insoluble. A water-solublecompound typically comprises from 1 weight % to 80 weight %, moretypically from 20 weight % to 50 weight %, of the solutes. Less solublecompounds may comprise a smaller proportion of the composition,typically up to 30 weight % of the solutes. Alternatively, the compoundof Formula I may be in the form of multiparticulate beads.

The film-forming polymer may be selected from natural polysaccharides,proteins, or synthetic hydrocolloids and is typically present in therange 0.01 to 99 weight %, more typically in the range 30 to 80 weight%.

Other possible ingredients include anti-oxidants, colorants, flavoringsand flavor enhancers, preservatives, salivary stimulating agents,cooling agents, co-solvents (including oils), emollients, bulkingagents, anti-foaming agents, surfactants and taste-masking agents.

Films in accordance with the invention are typically prepared byevaporative drying of thin aqueous films coated onto a peelable backingsupport or paper. This may be done in a drying oven or tunnel, typicallya combined coater dryer, or by freeze-drying or vacuuming.

Solid formulations for oral administration may be formulated to beimmediate and/or modified release. Modified release formulations includedelayed-, sustained-, pulsed-, controlled-, targeted and programmedrelease.

Suitable modified release formulations for the purposes of the inventionare described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,106,864. Details of other suitablerelease technologies such as high energy dispersions and osmotic andcoated particles are to be found in Verma et al., PharmaceuticalTechnology On-line, 25(2), 1-14 (2001). The use of chewing gum toachieve controlled release is described in WO 00/35298.

The compounds of the invention (including pharmaceutically acceptablesalts thereof and N-oxides thereof) may also be administered directlyinto the blood stream, into muscle, or into an internal organ. Suitablemeans for parenteral administration include intravenous, intraarterial,intraperitoneal, intrathecal, intraventricular, intraurethral,intrasternal, intracranial, intramuscular, intrasynovial andsubcutaneous. Suitable devices for parenteral administration includeneedle (including microneedle) injectors, needle-free injectors andinfusion techniques.

Parenteral formulations are typically aqueous solutions which maycontain excipients such as salts, carbohydrates and buffering agents(for example to a pH of from 3 to 9), but, for some applications, theymay be more suitably formulated as a sterile non-aqueous solution or asa dried form to be used in conjunction with a suitable vehicle such assterile, pyrogen-free water.

The preparation of parenteral formulations under sterile conditions, forexample, by lyophilization, may readily be accomplished using standardpharmaceutical techniques well known to those skilled in the art.

The solubility of compounds of Formula I used in the preparation ofparenteral solutions may be increased by the use of appropriateformulation techniques, such as the incorporation ofsolubility-enhancing agents.

Formulations for parenteral administration may be formulated to beimmediate and/or modified release. Modified release formulations includedelayed-, sustained-, pulsed-, controlled-, targeted and programmedrelease. Thus compounds of the invention may be formulated as asuspension or as a solid, semi-solid, or thixotropic liquid foradministration as an implanted depot providing modified release of theactive compound. Examples of such formulations include drug-coatedstents and semi-solids and suspensions comprising drug-loadedpoly(DL-lactic-coglycolic acid) (PLGA) microspheres.

The compounds of the invention (including pharmaceutically acceptablesalts thereof and N-oxides thereof) may also be administered topically,(intra)dermally, or transdermally to the skin or mucosa. Typicalformulations for this purpose include gels, hydrogels, lotions,solutions, creams, ointments, dusting powders, dressings, foams, films,skin patches, wafers, implants, sponges, fibers, bandages andmicroemulsions. Liposomes may also be used. Typical carriers includealcohol, water, mineral oil, liquid petrolatum, white petrolatum,glycerin, polyethylene glycol and propylene glycol. Penetrationenhancers may be incorporated. See e.g., Finnin and Morgan, J. Pharm.Sci. 1999, 88, 955-958.

Other means of topical administration include delivery byelectroporation, iontophoresis, phonophoresis, sonophoresis andmicroneedle or needle-free (e.g., Powderject™, Bioject™, etc.)injection.

Formulations for topical administration may be formulated to beimmediate and/or modified release. Modified release formulations includedelayed-, sustained-, pulsed-, controlled-, targeted and programmedrelease.

The compounds of the invention (including pharmaceutically acceptablesalts thereof and N-oxides thereof) can also be administeredintranasally or by inhalation, typically in the form of a dry powder(either alone; as a mixture, for example, in a dry blend with lactose;or as a mixed component particle, for example, mixed with phospholipids,such as phosphatidylcholine) from a dry powder inhaler, as an aerosolspray from a pressurized container, pump, spray, atomizer (for examplean atomizer using electrohydrodynamics to produce a fine mist), ornebulizer, with or without the use of a suitable propellant, such as1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane or 1,1,1,2,3,3,3-heptafluoropropane, or asnasal drops. For intranasal use, the powder may comprise a bioadhesiveagent, for example, chitosan or cyclodextrin.

The pressurized container, pump, spray, atomizer, or nebulizer containsa solution or suspension of the compound(s) of the invention comprising,for example, ethanol, aqueous ethanol, or a suitable alternative agentfor dispersing, solubilizing, or extending release of the active, apropellant(s) as solvent and an optional surfactant, such as sorbitantrioleate, oleic acid, or an oligolactic acid.

Prior to use in a dry powder or suspension formulation, the drug productis micronized to a size suitable for delivery by inhalation (typicallyless than 5 microns). This may be achieved by any appropriatecomminuting method, such as spiral jet milling, fluid bed jet milling,supercritical fluid processing to form nanoparticles, high pressurehomogenization, or spray drying.

Capsules (made, for example, from gelatin or hydroxypropyl methylcellulose), blisters and cartridges for use in an inhaler or insufflatormay be formulated to contain a powder mix of the compound of theinvention, a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch and aperformance modifier such as L-leucine, mannitol, or magnesium stearate.The lactose may be anhydrous or in the form of the monohydrate. Othersuitable excipients include dextran, glucose, maltose, sorbitol,xylitol, fructose, sucrose and trehalose.

A suitable solution formulation for use in an atomizer usingelectrohydrodynamics to produce a fine mist may contain from 1 μg to 20mg of the compound of the invention per actuation and the actuationvolume may vary from 1 μL to 100 μL. A typical formulation may comprisea compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,propylene glycol, sterile water, ethanol and sodium chloride.Alternative solvents which may be used instead of propylene glycolinclude glycerol and polyethylene glycol.

Suitable flavors, such as menthol and levomenthol, or sweeteners, suchas saccharin or saccharin sodium, may be added to those formulations ofthe invention intended for inhaled/intranasal administration.

Formulations for inhaled/intranasal administration may be formulated tobe immediate and/or modified release using, for example, PGLA. Modifiedrelease formulations include delayed-, sustained-, pulsed-, controlled-,targeted and programmed release.

In the case of dry powder inhalers and aerosols, the dosage unit isdetermined by means of a valve which delivers a metered amount. Units inaccordance with the invention are typically arranged to administer ametered dose or “puff” containing from 0.01 to 100 mg of the compound ofFormula I. The overall daily dose will typically be in the range 1 μg to200 mg, which may be administered in a single dose or, more usually, asdivided doses throughout the day.

The compounds of the invention may be administered rectally orvaginally, for example, in the form of a suppository, pessary, or enema.Cocoa butter is a traditional suppository base, but various alternativesmay be used as appropriate.

Formulations for rectal/vaginal administration may be formulated to beimmediate and/or modified release. Modified release formulations includedelayed-, sustained-, pulsed-, controlled-, targeted and programmedrelease.

The compounds of the invention may also be administered directly to theeye or ear, typically in the form of drops of a micronized suspension orsolution in isotonic, pH-adjusted, sterile saline. Other formulationssuitable for ocular and aural administration include ointments, gels,biodegradable (e.g., absorbable gel sponges, collagen) andnon-biodegradable (e.g., silicone) implants, wafers, lenses andparticulate or vesicular systems, such as niosomes or liposomes. Apolymer such as crossed-linked polyacrylic acid, polyvinylalcohol,hyaluronic acid, a cellulosic polymer, for example, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, or methyl cellulose, or aheteropolysaccharide polymer, for example, gelan gum, may beincorporated together with a preservative, such as benzalkoniumchloride. Such formulations may also be delivered by iontophoresis.

Formulations for ocular/aural administration may be formulated to beimmediate and/or modified release. Modified release formulations includedelayed-, sustained-, pulsed-, controlled-, targeted, or programmedrelease.

The compounds of the invention may be combined with solublemacromolecular entities, such as cyclodextrin and suitable derivativesthereof or polyethylene glycol-containing polymers, in order to improvetheir solubility, dissolution rate, taste-masking, bioavailabilityand/or stability for use in any of the aforementioned modes ofadministration.

Drug-cyclodextrin complexes, for example, are found to be generallyuseful for most dosage forms and administration routes. Both inclusionand non-inclusion complexes may be used. As an alternative to directcomplexation with the drug, the cyclodextrin may be used as an auxiliaryadditive, i.e., as a carrier, diluent, or solubilizer. Most commonlyused for these purposes are alpha-, beta- and gamma-cyclodextrins,examples of which may be found in International Patent Applications Nos.WO 91/11172, WO 94/02518 and WO 98/55148.

Since the present invention has an aspect that relates to the treatmentof the disease/conditions described herein with a combination of activeingredients which may be administered separately, the invention alsorelates to combining separate pharmaceutical compositions in kit form.The kit comprises two separate pharmaceutical compositions: a compoundof Formula I a prodrug thereof or a salt of such compound or prodrug anda second compound as described above. The kit comprises means forcontaining the separate compositions such as a container, a dividedbottle or a divided foil packet. Typically the kit comprises directionsfor the administration of the separate components. The kit form isparticularly advantageous when the separate components are for exampleadministered in different dosage forms (e.g., oral and parenteral), areadministered at different dosage intervals, or when titration of theindividual components of the combination is desired by the prescribingphysician.

An example of such a kit is a so-called blister pack. Blister packs arewell known in the packaging industry and are being widely used for thepackaging of pharmaceutical unit dosage forms (tablets, capsules, andthe like). Blister packs generally consist of a sheet of relativelystiff material covered with a foil of a transparent plastic material.During the packaging process recesses are formed in the plastic foil.The recesses have the size and shape of the tablets or capsules to bepacked. Next, the tablets or capsules are placed in the recesses and thesheet of relatively stiff material is sealed against the plastic foil atthe face of the foil which is opposite from the direction in which therecesses were formed. As a result, the tablets or capsules are sealed inthe recesses between the plastic foil and the sheet. In someembodiments, the strength of the sheet is such that the tablets orcapsules can be removed from the blister pack by manually applyingpressure on the recesses whereby an opening is formed in the sheet atthe place of the recess. The tablet or capsule can then be removed viasaid opening.

It may be desirable to provide a memory aid on the kit, e.g., in theform of numbers next to the tablets or capsules whereby the numberscorrespond with the days of the regimen which the tablets or capsules sospecified should be ingested. Another example of such a memory aid is acalendar printed on the card, e.g., as follows “First Week, Monday,Tuesday, etc. . . . Second Week, Monday, Tuesday, . . . ” etc. Othervariations of memory aids will be readily apparent. A “daily dose” canbe a single tablet or capsule or several pills or capsules to be takenon a given day. Also, a daily dose of Formula I compound can consist ofone tablet or capsule while a daily dose of the second compound canconsist of several tablets or capsules and vice versa. The memory aidshould reflect this.

In another specific embodiment of the invention, a dispenser designed todispense the daily doses one at a time in the order of their intendeduse is provided. For example, the dispenser is equipped with a memoryaid, so as to further facilitate compliance with the regimen. An exampleof such a memory aid is a mechanical counter which indicates the numberof daily doses that has been dispensed. Another example of such a memoryaid is a battery-powered micro-chip memory coupled with a liquid crystalreadout, or audible reminder signal which, for example, reads out thedate that the last daily dose has been taken and/or reminds one when thenext dose is to be taken.

The invention will be described in greater detail by way of specificexamples. The following examples are offered for illustrative purposes,and are not intended to limit the invention in any manner. Those ofskill in the art will readily recognize a variety of non-criticalparameters that can be changed or modified to yield essentially the sameresults. In the following Examples and Preparations, “DMSO” meansdimethyl sulfoxide, “N” where referring to concentration means Normal,“M” means molar, “mL” means milliliter, “mmol” means millimoles, “μmol”means micromoles, “eq.” means equivalent, “° C.” means degrees Celsius,“MHz” means megahertz, “HPLC” means high-performance liquidchromatography.

EXAMPLES

Experiments were generally carried out under inert atmosphere (nitrogenor argon), particularly in cases where oxygen- or moisture-sensitivereagents or intermediates were employed. Commercial solvents andreagents were generally used without further purification, includinganhydrous solvents where appropriate (generally Sure-Seal™ products fromthe Aldrich Chemical Company, Milwaukee, Wis.). Products were generallydried under vacuum before being carried on to further reactions orsubmitted for biological testing. Mass spectrometry data is reportedfrom either liquid chromatography-mass spectrometry (LCMS), atmosphericpressure chemical ionization (APCI) or gas chromatography-massspectrometry (GCMS) instrumentation. Chemical shifts for nuclearmagnetic resonance (NMR) data are expressed in parts per million (ppm,δ) referenced to residual peaks from the deuterated solvents employed.In some examples, chiral separations were carried out to separateatropisomers (or atropenantiomers) of certain compounds of the invention(in some examples, the separated atropisomers are designated as ENT-1and ENT-2, according to their order of elution). In some examples, theoptical rotation of an atropisomer was measured using a polarimeter.According to its observed rotation data (or its specific rotation data),an atropisomer (or atropenantiomer) with a clockwise rotation wasdesignated as the (+)-atropisomer [or the (+) atropenantiomer] and anatropisomer (or atropenantiomer) with a counter-clockwise rotation wasdesignated as the (−)-atropisomer [or the (−) atropenantiomer].

For syntheses referencing procedures in other Examples or Methods,reaction conditions (length of reaction and temperature) may vary. Ingeneral, reactions were followed by thin layer chromatography or massspectrometry, and subjected to work-up when appropriate. Purificationsmay vary between experiments: in general, solvents and the solventratios used for eluents/gradients were chosen to provide appropriateR_(f)s or retention times.

PREPARATIONS

Preparations P1-P8 describe preparations of some starting materials orintermediates used for preparation of certain compounds of theinvention.

Preparation P14-Chloro-1-{[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl}-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine(P1)

A mixture of 4-chloro-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine (98%, 2.0 g, 13 mmol)and tetrahydrofuran (20 mL) was cooled to 0° C. Sodium hydride (60% inoil, 1.03 g, 25.8 mmol) was added portion-wise over 5 minutes, and thereaction mixture was allowed to stir at 0° C. for 10 minutes.2-(Trimethylsilyl)ethoxymethyl chloride (3.40 mL, 19.3 mmol) was thenadded drop-wise over 5 minutes, and stirring was continued at 0° C. for15 minutes. The reaction mixture was quenched with saturated aqueousammonium chloride solution; the aqueous layer was extracted twice withethyl acetate, and the combined organic layers were dried over sodiumsulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. Silica gel chromatography(Gradient: 10% to 20% ethyl acetate in heptane) afforded the product asa colorless oil. Yield: 2.64 g, 9.33 mmol, 72%.

LCMS m/z 283.0 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.13 (d, J=5.8 Hz, 1H),7.34 (dd, J=5.8, 0.7 Hz, 1H), 7.25 (d, J=3.3 Hz, 1H), 6.69 (dd, J=3.3,0.7 Hz, 1H), 5.48 (s, 2H), 3.46 (dd, J=8.2, 8.1 Hz, 2H), 0.89 (dd,J=8.2, 8.1 Hz, 2H), −0.05 (s, 9H).

Preparation P2 tert-Butyl4-chloro-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-1-carboxylate (P2)

Di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (99%, 650 mg, 2.95 mmol) was added to asolution of 4-chloro-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine (300 mg, 1.97 mmol) and4-(dimethylamino)pyridine (97%, 124 mg, 0.984 mmol) in acetonitrile (3mL), and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18hours. Volatiles were removed in vacuo, and the residue was purified viachromatography on silica gel (Gradient: 0% to 50% ethyl acetate inheptane) to afford the product as a white solid.

Yield: 410 mg, 1.62 mmol, 82%. LCMS m/z 253.0 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz,CDCl₃) δ 8.24 (d, J=5.7 Hz, 1H), 7.95 (br d, J=5.7 Hz, 1H), 7.65 (d,J=3.7 Hz, 1H), 6.72 (dd, J=3.7, 0.8 Hz, 1H), 1.70 (s, 9H).

Preparation P34-Chloro-1-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine (P3)

p-Toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (2.4 g, 13 mmol) and3,4-dihydro-2H-pyran (99%, 45 mL, 520 mmol) were sequentially added to asuspension of 4-chloro-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine (20.0 g, 130 mmol) indichloromethane (400 mL). The reaction mixture was allowed to stir atroom temperature for 24 hours, at which time it was washed withsaturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution. The organic layer wasdried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo.Purification via silica gel chromatography (Eluents: 10%, then 30%, then50% ethyl acetate in heptane) afforded the product as a white solid.Yield: 27.51 g, 115.7 mmol, 89%. LCMS m/z 238.1 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz,CDCl₃) δ 8.19 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 8.16 (d, J=0.9 Hz, 1H), 7.47 (dd,J=6.0, 0.9 Hz, 1H), 5.73 (br dd, J=9.0, 2.7 Hz, 1H), 3.97-4.04 (m, 1H),3.72-3.80 (m, 1H), 2.43-2.53 (m, 1H), 2.07-2.20 (m, 2H), 1.65-1.85 (m,3H).

Preparation P44-Chloro-6-methyl-1-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine(P4)

Step 1. Synthesis of 4-chloro-6-methyl-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine (C1)

To a solution of 2,4-dichloro-6-methylpyridine-3-carbaldehyde (12 g, 63mmol) in 1,2-dichloroethane (200 mL) was added hydrazine monohydrate(9.52 g, 0.190 mol), and the reaction mixture was heated at 80° C. for18 hours. After removal of solvents in vacuo, the residue was suspendedin water (150 mL) and stirred for 30 minutes. The resulting precipitatewas collected by filtration and washed with petroleum ether (2×250 mL),then was suspended in chloroform (150 mL), stirred for 30 minutes andfiltered. The chloroform suspension was repeated twice to afford theproduct as a white solid. Yield: 6.7 g, 40 mmol, 63%. LCMS m/z 168.1[M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 13.70 (br s, 1H), 8.21 (s, 1H), 7.38(s, 1H), 2.52 (s, 3H).

Step 2. Synthesis of P4

p-Toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (29 mg, 0.15 mmol) and3,4-dihydro-2H-pyran (99%, 205 μL, 2.39 mmol) were sequentially added toa suspension of C1 (250 mg, 1.49 mmol) and 4 Å molecular sieves indichloromethane (10 mL). The reaction mixture was allowed to stir atroom temperature for 4 hours, at which time it was filtered,concentrated in vacuo, and washed three times with heptane. Purificationvia silica gel chromatography (Gradient: 20% to 50% ethyl acetate inheptane) afforded the product as a colorless oil. Yield: 65 mg, 0.26mmol, 17%. LCMS m/z 252.1 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃),characteristic peaks: δ 8.08 (d, J=0.9 Hz, 1H), 7.26-7.27 (m, 1H), 5.67(dd, J=9.1, 2.8 Hz, 1H), 3.99-4.05 (m, 1H), 3.71-3.79 (m, 1H), 2.65 (d,J=0.8 Hz, 3H), 2.06-2.2 (m, 2H).

Preparation P54-Chloro-7-methoxy-1-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine(P5)

Step 1. Synthesis of 2-chloro-5-methoxy-3-methylpyridine 1-oxide (C2)

3-Chloroperoxybenzoic acid (70%, 695 mg, 2.82 mmol) was added to asolution of 2-chloro-5-methoxy-3-methylpyridine (370 mg, 2.35 mmol) indichloromethane (10 mL). After stirring for 18 hours at roomtemperature, the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and purifiedvia silica gel chromatography (Gradient: 0% to 10% methanol in ethylacetate) to afford the product as a white solid. Yield: 370 mg, 2.13mmol, 91%. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CD₃OD) δ 8.14 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.23 (d,J=2.3 Hz, 1H), 3.88 (s, 3H), 2.44 (s, 3H).

Step 2. Synthesis of 2-chloro-5-methoxy-3-methyl-4-nitropyridine 1-oxide(C3)

Concentrated nitric acid (2.5 mL) was added drop-wise to a 0° C.solution of C2 (350 mg, 2.02 mmol) in concentrated sulfuric acid (2.5mL). The reaction mixture was heated at 90° C. for 1 hour, then cooledto room temperature and poured onto crushed ice. The resulting mixturewas neutralized to pH 6-7 with saturated aqueous sodium carbonatesolution, and extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layerswere washed with water, washed with saturated aqueous sodium chloridesolution, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated invacuo to provide the product as a light yellow solid. Yield: 370 mg,1.69 mmol, 84%. LCMS m/z 219.0, 221.1 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆)δ 8.65 (s, 1H), 3.94 (s, 3H), 2.31 (s, 3H).

Step 3. Synthesis of 2-chloro-5-methoxy-3-methylpyridin-4-amine (C4)

Iron powder (700 mg, 12 mmol) was added to a solution of C3 (350 mg,1.60 mmol) in acetic acid (8 mL), and the reaction mixture was heated at100° C. for 1 hour, then cooled to room temperature. After filtrationthrough Celite and thorough washing of the filter pad with ethyl acetateand methanol, the combined filtrates were concentrated in vacuo. Theresidue was diluted with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solutionand extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers werewashed with water, washed with saturated aqueous sodium chloridesolution, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated underreduced pressure. Silica gel chromatography (Gradient: 50% to 75% ethylacetate in heptane) afforded the product as a white solid. Yield: 240mg, 1.39 mmol, 87%. LCMS m/z 173.0 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ7.65 (s, 1H), 4.38 (br s, 2H), 3.91 (s, 3H), 2.20 (s, 3H).

Step 4. Synthesis of 4-chloro-7-methoxy-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine (C5)

A solution of sodium nitrite (98%, 326 mg, 4.63 mmol) in water (0.6 mL)was added to a solution of C4 (200 mg, 1.16 mmol) in acetic acid (8 mL),and the reaction mixture was heated at 75° C. for 1 hour. After thereaction mixture had cooled to room temperature, it was concentrated invacuo, diluted with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution, andextracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers were washedwith saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution, dried over magnesiumsulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. Silica gelchromatography (Gradient: 25% to 50% ethyl acetate in heptane) providedthe product as a yellow solid. Yield: 140 mg, 0.763 mmol, 66%. LCMS m/z184.0 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.17 (s, 1H), 7.74 (s, 1H), 4.06(s, 3H).

Step 5. Synthesis of P5

C5 was converted to the product using the method described for synthesisof 4-chloro-1-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine P3in Preparation P3. The product was obtained as a light yellow oil, whichsolidified upon standing. Yield: 120 mg, 0.448 mmol, 41%.

LCMS m/z 268.1 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.11-8.12 (m, 1H), 7.72(s, 1H), 6.12 (dd, J=10.0, 2.6 Hz, 1H), 4.06 (s, 3H), 4.04-4.10 (m, 1H),3.69-3.77 (m, 1H), 2.51-2.62 (m, 1H), 2.12-2.21 (m, 1H), 2.00-2.08 (m,1H), 1.5-1.8 (m, 3H).

Preparation P64-Chloro-1-{[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl}-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine(P6)

4-Chloro-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine was converted to the product usingthe method described for synthesis of P1 in Preparation P1. The productwas isolated as a white solid.

Yield: 686 mg, 2.42 mmol, 50%. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.24 (d, J=5.8Hz, 1H), 8.17 (s, 1H), 7.43 (d, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 5.74 (s, 2H), 3.54-3.60(m, 2H), 0.86-0.92 (m, 2H), −0.05 (s, 9H).

Preparation P74-Chloro-1-{[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl}-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-3-carbonitrile(P7)

Step 1. Synthesis of 4-chloro-3-iodo-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine (C6)

N-Iodosuccinimide (1.3 g, 5.8 mmol) was added to a 0° C. solution of4-chloro-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine (0.60 g, 3.9 mmol) inN,N-dimethylformamide (10 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at roomtemperature for 18 hours, whereupon it was concentrated in vacuo.Purification via silica gel chromatography (0% to 50% ethyl acetate inpetroleum ether) afforded the product as a yellow solid. Yield: 900 mg,3.2 mmol, 82%. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.10 (d, J=5.5 Hz, 1H), 7.42(d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.34 (d, J=5.8 Hz, 1H).

Step 2. Synthesis of4-chloro-3-iodo-1-{[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl}-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine(C7)

To a 0° C. solution of C6 (900 mg, 3.2 mmol) in N,N-dimethylformamide (3mL) and tetrahydrofuran (70 mL) was added sodium hydride (60% in mineraloil, 168 mg, 4.2 mmol). After 5 minutes, 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxymethylchloride (592 mg, 3.55 mmol) was added to the cold mixture. The reactionmixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours, then cooled to 0°C. and treated with additional sodium hydride (56 mg, 1.4 mmol) and2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxymethyl chloride (197 mg, 1.18 mmol). Afterstirring at room temperature for 18 hours, the reaction mixture wasdiluted with saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution (100 mL) andextracted with ethyl acetate (2×100 mL). The combined organic layerswere dried, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. Silica gelchromatography (Gradient: 0% to 30% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether)provided the product as a yellow oil. Yield: 650 mg, 1.59 mmol, 50%. ¹HNMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.14 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.39 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 1H),7.38 (s, 1H), 5.44 (s, 2H), 3.44-3.50 (m, 2H), 0.86-0.92 (m, 2H), −0.03(s, 9H).

Step 3. Synthesis of P7

To a mixture of C7 (1.2 g, 2.9 mmol) and copper(I) cyanide (540 mg, 6.0mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (40 mL) were addedtris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0) (275 mg, 0.300 mmol) and1,1′-binaphthalene-2,2′-diylbis(diphenylphosphane) (BINAP, 540 mg, 0.87mmol). After the reaction mixture had been stirred at 110° C. for 18hours, it was filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure.Purification via silica gel chromatography (Gradient: 5% to 20% ethylacetate in petroleum ether) afforded the product as a yellow solid.Yield: 380 mg, 1.2 mmol, 41%. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.27 (d, J=5.8Hz, 1H), 7.80 (s, 1H), 7.43 (d, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 5.52 (s, 2H), 3.47-3.54(m, 2H), 0.88-0.95 (m, 2H), −0.02 (s, 9H).

Preparation P86-(4-Hydroxy-2-methylphenyl)-1,5-dimethylpyrazin-2(1H)-one (P8)

Step 1. Synthesis of 1-(4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)propan-2-one (C8)

Four batches of this experiment were carried out (4×250 g substrate).Tributyl(methoxy)stannane (400 g, 1.24 mol),1-bromo-4-methoxy-2-methylbenzene (250 g, 1.24 mol), prop-1-en-2-ylacetate (187 g, 1.87 mol), palladium(II) acetate (7.5 g, 33 mmol) andtris(2-methylphenyl)phosphane (10 g, 33 mmol) were stirred together intoluene (2 L) at 100° C. for 18 hours. After cooling to roomtemperature, the reaction mixture was treated with aqueous potassiumfluoride solution (4 M, 400 mL) and stirred for 2 hours at 40° C. Theresulting mixture was diluted with toluene (500 mL) and filtered throughCelite; the filter pad was thoroughly washed with ethyl acetate (2×1.5L). The organic phase from the combined filtrates was dried over sodiumsulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. Purification via silicagel chromatography (Gradient: 0% to 5% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether)provided the product as a yellow oil. Combined yield: 602 g, 3.38 mol,68%. LCMS m/z 179.0 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.05 (d, J=8.3 Hz,1H), 6.70-6.77 (m, 2H), 3.79 (s, 3H), 3.65 (s, 2H), 2.22 (s, 3H), 2.14(s, 3H).

Step 2. Synthesis of 1-(4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)propane-1,2-dione (C9)

C8 (6.00 g, 33.7 mmol) and selenium dioxide (7.47 g, 67.3 mmol) weresuspended in 1,4-dioxane (50 mL) and heated at 100° C. for 18 hours. Thereaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and filtered throughCelite; the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. Silica gelchromatography (Eluent: 10% ethyl acetate in heptane) afforded theproduct as a bright yellow oil. Yield: 2.55 g, 13.3 mmol, 39%. LCMS m/z193.1 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.66 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 1H), 6.81 (brd, half of AB quartet, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 6.78 (br dd, half of ABX pattern,J=8.7, 2.6 Hz, 1H), 3.87 (s, 3H), 2.60 (br s, 3H), 2.51 (s, 3H).

Step 3. Synthesis of6-(4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)-5-methylpyrazin-2(1H)-one (C10)

C9 (4.0 g, 21 mmol) and glycinamide acetate (2.79 g, 20.8 mmol) weredissolved in methanol (40 mL) and cooled to −10° C. Aqueous sodiumhydroxide solution (12 N, 3.5 mL, 42 mmol) was added, and the resultingmixture was slowly warmed to room temperature. After stirring for 3days, the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo. The residue wasdiluted with water, and 1 N aqueous hydrochloric acid was added untilthe pH was approximately 7. The aqueous phase was extracted with ethylacetate, and the combined organic extracts were washed with saturatedaqueous sodium chloride solution, dried over magnesium sulfate,filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting residuewas slurried with 3:1 ethyl acetate/heptane, stirred for 5 minutes,filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. Silica gel chromatography (Eluent:ethyl acetate) provided the product as a tan solid that contained 15% ofan undesired regioisomer; this material was used without furtherpurification. Yield: 2.0 g.

LCMS m/z 231.1 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.09 (s, 1H), 7.14 (d,J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 6.82-6.87 (m, 2H), 3.86 (s, 3H), 2.20 (s, 3H), 2.11 (s,3H).

Step 4. Synthesis of6-(4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)-1,5-dimethylpyrazin-2(1H)-one (C11)

C10 (from the previous step, 1.9 g) was dissolved inN,N-dimethylformamide (40 mL). Lithium bromide (0.86 g, 9.9 mmol) andsodium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (95%, 1.91 g, 9.89 mmol) were added, andthe resulting solution was stirred for 30 minutes. Methyl iodide (0.635mL, 10.2 mmol) was added and stirring was continued at room temperaturefor 18 hours. The reaction mixture was then diluted with water andbrought to a pH of approximately 7 by slow portion-wise addition of 1 Naqueous hydrochloric acid. The aqueous layer was extracted with ethylacetate and the combined organic layers were washed several times withwater, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated. Silicagel chromatography (Gradient: 75% to 100% ethyl acetate in heptane)afforded the product as a viscous orange oil. Yield: 1.67 g, 6.84 mmol,33% over two steps. LCMS m/z 245.1 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ8.17 (s, 1H), 7.03 (br d, J=8 Hz, 1H), 6.85-6.90 (m, 2H), 3.86 (s, 3H),3.18 (s, 3H), 2.08 (br s, 3H), 2.00 (s, 3H).

Step 5. Synthesis of P8

To a −78° C. solution of C11 (1.8 g, 7.37 mmol) in dichloromethane (40mL) was added a solution of boron tribromide in dichloromethane (1 M, 22mL, 22 mmol). The cooling bath was removed after 30 minutes, and thereaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stir for 18hours. The reaction was cooled to −78° C., and methanol (10 mL) wasslowly added; the resulting mixture was slowly warmed to roomtemperature. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo, methanol(20 mL) was added, and the mixture was again concentrated under reducedpressure. The residue was diluted with ethyl acetate (300 mL) and water(200 mL) and the aqueous layer was brought to pH 7 via portion-wiseaddition of saturated aqueous sodium carbonate solution. The mixture wasextracted with ethyl acetate (3×200 mL). The combined organic extractswere washed with water and with saturated aqueous sodium chloridesolution, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated invacuo to afford the product as a light tan solid. Yield: 1.4 g, 6.0mmol, 81%. LCMS m/z 231.1 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.21 (s,1H), 6.98 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 6.87-6.89 (m, 1H), 6.85 (br dd, J=8.2, 2.5Hz, 1H), 3.22 (s, 3H), 2.06 (br s, 3H), 2.03 (s, 3H).

Example 14-[4-(4,6-Dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-fluorophenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine(1)

Step 1. Synthesis of4-(4-bromo-3-fluorophenoxy)-1-{[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl}-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine(C12)

A mixture of P1 (2.9 g, 10 mmol), 4-bromo-3-fluorophenol (3.4 g, 18mmol), palladium(II) acetate (168 mg, 0.748 mmol),4,5-bis(diphenylphosphino)-9,9-dimethylxanthene (Xantphos, 0.87 g, 1.5mmol) and cesium carbonate (9.8 g, 30 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (60 mL) wasstirred at 120° C. for 4 hours. The mixture was filtered, the filtratewas concentrated in vacuo, and the residue was purified by silica gelchromatography (Eluent: 10:1 petroleum ether/ethyl acetate) to providethe product as a colorless oil. Yield: 1.6 g, 3.7 mmol, 37%. ¹H NMR (400MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.90 (d, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.55 (dd, J=8.5, 8.0 Hz, 1H),7.17-7.21 (m, 2H), 7.08 (dd, J=9.4, 2.6 Hz, 1H), 6.94-6.99 (m, 1H), 6.68(d, J=3.3 Hz, 1H), 5.49 (s, 2H), 3.50 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 0.91 (t, J=8.1Hz, 2H), −0.04 (s, 9H).

Step 2. Synthesis of4-[3-fluoro-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)phenoxy]-1-{[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl}-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine(C13)

A mixture of C12 (1.2 g, 2.7 mmol),4,4,4′,4′,5,5,5′,5′-octamethyl-2,2′-bi-1,3,2-dioxaborolane (1.38 g, 5.43mmol), potassium acetate (0.8 g, 8 mmol) and[1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) (150 mg,0.20 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (20 mL) was stirred at 120° C. for 5 hours.After completion of the reaction, the mixture was filtered and thefiltrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification usingsilica gel chromatography (Eluent: 15:1 petroleum ether/ethyl acetate)afforded the product as an orange oil. Yield: 0.94 g, 1.9 mmol, 70%. ¹HNMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.92 (d, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.77 (dd, J=7.9, 7.2 Hz,1H), 7.19 (d, J=5.9 Hz, 1H), 7.17 (d, J=3.3 Hz, 1H), 6.99-7.03 (m, 1H),6.90-6.94 (m, 1H), 6.62 (d, J=3.3 Hz, 1H), 5.49 (s, 2H), 3.49 (t, J=8.1Hz, 2H), 1.36 (s, 12H), 0.90 (t, J=8.2 Hz, 2H), −0.04 (s, 9H).

Step 3. Synthesis of4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-fluorophenoxy]-1-{[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl}-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine(C14)

A mixture of C13 (427 mg, 0.881 mmol), 5-bromo-4,6-dimethylpyrimidine(150 mg, 0.802 mmol), tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0) (147 mg,0.160 mmol), tricyclohexylphosphine (90 mg, 0.32 mmol) and potassiumphosphate (341 mg, 1.61 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (4 mL) containing 5 dropsof water was heated at 120° C. for 2 hours under microwave irradiation.The mixture was filtered, the filtrate was concentrated under reducedpressure, and the residue was purified by preparative thin layerchromatography on silica gel (Eluent: ethyl acetate) to give theproduct, which was used without further purification. Yield: 180 mg,0.387 mmol, 48%. LCMS m/z 465.3 [M+H⁺].

Step 4. Synthesis of4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-fluorophenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine(1)

A solution of C14 (180 mg, 0.387 mmol) in trifluoroacetic acid (6 mL)was heated to 90° C. for 2 hours. The mixture was concentrated underreduced pressure and the residue was dissolved in acetonitrile (5 mL)and water (1 mL). Solid potassium carbonate (1 g) was added, and themixture was refluxed for 2 hours. The suspension was filtered and thefiltrate was concentrated in vacuo. Purification via preparativereversed phase high-performance liquid chromatography (Column:Phenomenex Synergi C18, 4 μm; Mobile phase A: 0.1% formic acid in water;Mobile phase B: 0.1% formic acid in acetonitrile; Gradient: 18% to 28%B) afforded the product as a white solid. Yield: 114 mg, 0.341 mmol,88%. LCMS m/z 334.9 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CD₃OD) δ 8.96 (s, 1H), 8.01(d, J=6.5 Hz, 1H), 7.67 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 1H), 7.61 (d, J=3.0 Hz, 1H),7.47-7.58 (m, 2H), 7.41 (br d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.17 (d, J=3.0 Hz, 1H),2.39 (s, 6H).

Example 24-[4-(1,4-Dimethyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine(2)

Step 1. Synthesis of4-(4-bromo-3-methylphenoxy)-1-{[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl}-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine(C15)

P1 (326 mg, 1.15 mmol), 4-bromo-3-methylphenol (216 mg, 1.15 mmol),di-tert-butyl[3,4,5,6-tetramethyl-2′,4′,6′-tri(propan-2-yl)biphenyl-2-yl]phosphane(97%, 114 mg, 0.230 mmol), palladium(II) acetate (95%, 19.1 mg, 80.8μmol) and cesium carbonate (1.13 g, 3.47 mmol) were combined in1,4-dioxane (7 mL) in a sealable tube, and the reaction mixture washeated at 130° C. for 18 hours. Ethyl acetate was added, and the mixturewas filtered through Celite, concentrated in vacuo and purified twicevia silica gel chromatography (Gradient: 0% to 50% ethyl acetate inheptane). The product was obtained as an oil that still contained someof the phenol starting material. Yield: 395 mg, <0.91 mmol, <79%. LCMSm/z 434.9 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl₃), product peaks only: δ 7.91(d, J=5.9 Hz, 1H), 7.52 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.19-7.22 (m, 2H), 7.12 (brd, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 6.94 (br dd, J=8.7, 2.8 Hz, 1H), 6.69 (br d, J=3.2 Hz,1H), 5.51 (s, 2H), 3.51-3.56 (m, 2H), 2.36 (s, 3H), 0.92-0.97 (m, 2H),0.01 (s, 9H).

Step 2. Synthesis of4-[4-(1,4-dimethyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1-{[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl}-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine(C16)

To a mixture of C15 (100 mg, 0.231 mmol), 1,4-dioxane (2 mL) and water(0.5 mL) was added1,4-dimethyl-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole(56 mg, 0.25 mmol),[1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) (25.6 mg,0.0350 mmol) and potassium carbonate (97 mg, 0.70 mmol) at roomtemperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at 120° C. for 1 hour;after cooling to room temperature, the mixture was filtered and thefiltrate was concentrated in vacuo. Purification via preparative thinlayer chromatography on silica gel (Eluent: 1:1 petroleum ether/ethylacetate) provided the product as a red oil. Yield: 51 mg, 0.11 mmol,48%. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CD₃OD) δ 7.80 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.43 (d, J=3.3Hz, 1H), 7.37-7.40 (m, 2H), 7.21 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 1H), 7.16 (br d, J=2.0Hz, 1H), 7.08 (br dd, J=8.3, 2.5 Hz, 1H), 6.61 (d, J=3.3 Hz, 1H), 5.60(s, 2H), 3.61 (s, 3H), 3.51-3.57 (m, 2H), 2.09 (s, 3H), 1.91 (s, 3H),0.85-0.91 (m, 2H), −0.06 (s, 9H).

Step 3. Synthesis of4-[4-(1,4-dimethyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine(2)

A solution of C16 (51 mg, 0.11 mmol) in trifluoroacetic acid (2 mL) wasstirred at 80° C. for 1 hour. After cooling to room temperature, themixture was concentrated in vacuo to afford{4-[4-(1,4-dimethyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-1-yl}methanol(C17) (38 mg, 100%), which was combined with potassium carbonate (100mg), acetonitrile (2 mL) and water (0.3 mL). This reaction mixture wasstirred at 80-85° C. for 24 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled toroom temperature and concentrated under reduced pressure; purificationby preparative thin layer chromatography on silica gel (Eluent: 1:3petroleum ether/ethyl acetate) provided the product as a white solid.Yield: 16 mg, 50 μmol, 45%. LCMS m/z 318.9 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz,CD₃OD) δ 7.71 (d, J=5.5 Hz, 1H), 7.38 (s, 1H), 7.32 (d, J=3.5 Hz, 1H),7.23 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.20 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.14 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H),7.06 (dd, J=8.3, 2.3 Hz, 1H), 6.53 (d, J=3.0 Hz, 1H), 3.60 (s, 3H), 2.09(s, 3H), 1.91 (s, 3H).

Examples 3 and 4(+)-4,6-Dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one(3) and(−)-4,6-Dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one(4)

Step 1. Synthesis of 4-hydroxy-3,5-dimethylfuran-2(5H)-one (C18)

Methylation of ethyl 3-oxopentanoate according to the method of D.Kalaitzakis et al., Tetrahedron: Asymmetry 2007, 18, 2418-2426, affordedethyl 2-methyl-3-oxopentanoate; subsequent treatment with 1 equivalentof bromine in chloroform provided ethyl4-bromo-2-methyl-3-oxopentanoate. This crude material (139 g, 586 mmol)was slowly added to a 0° C. solution of potassium hydroxide (98.7 g,1.76 mol) in water (700 mL). The internal reaction temperature rose to30° C. during the addition. The reaction mixture was subjected tovigorous stirring for 4 hours in an ice bath, at which point it wasacidified via slow addition of concentrated hydrochloric acid. Afterextraction with ethyl acetate, the aqueous layer was saturated withsolid sodium chloride and extracted three additional times with ethylacetate. The combined organic layers were washed with saturated aqueoussodium chloride solution, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, andconcentrated under reduced pressure to afford a mixture of oil and solid(81.3 g). This material was suspended in chloroform (200 mL); the solidswere removed via filtration and washed with chloroform (2×50 mL). Thecombined filtrates were concentrated in vacuo and treated with a 3:1mixture of heptane and diethyl ether (300 mL). The mixture wasvigorously swirled until some of the oil began to solidify. It was thenconcentrated under reduced pressure to afford an oily solid (60.2 g).After addition of a 3:1 mixture of heptane and diethyl ether (300 mL)and vigorous stirring for 10 minutes, the solid was collected byfiltration to afford the product as an off-white solid. Yield: 28.0 g,219 mmol, 37%. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 4.84 (br q, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 1.74(br s, 3H), 1.50 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 3H).

Step 2. Synthesis of 2,4-dimethyl-5-oxo-2,5-dihydrofuran-3-yltrifluoromethanesulfonate (C19)

Trifluoromethanesulfonic anhydride (23.7 mL, 140 mmol) was addedportion-wise to a solution of C18 (15.0 g, 117 mmol) andN,N-diisopropylethylamine (99%, 24.8 mL, 140 mmol) in dichloromethane(500 mL) at −20° C., at a rate sufficient to maintain the internalreaction temperature below −10° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at−20° C., and allowed to warm gradually to 0° C. over 5 hours. Thereaction mixture was then passed through a plug of silica gel, driedover magnesium sulfate, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue wassuspended in diethyl ether and filtered; the filtrate was concentratedunder reduced pressure. Purification using silica gel chromatography(Gradient: 0% to 17% ethyl acetate in heptane) afforded the product as apale yellow oil. Yield: 21.06 g, 80.94 mmol, 69%. ¹H NMR (400 MHz,CDCl₃) δ 5.09-5.16 (m, 1H), 1.94-1.96 (m, 3H), 1.56 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 3H).

Step 3. Synthesis of2-[4-(benzyloxy)-2-methylphenyl]-4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolane(C20)

Benzyl 4-bromo-3-methylphenyl ether (19 g, 69 mmol),[1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) (7.5 g, 10.2mmol), potassium acetate (26.9 g, 274 mmol) and4,4,4′,4′,5,5,5′,5′-octamethyl-2,2′-bi-1,3,2-dioxaborolane (20 g, 79mmol) were combined in 1,4-dioxane (500 mL) and heated at reflux for 2hours. The reaction mixture was filtered through Celite; the filtratewas concentrated in vacuo and purified by silica gel chromatography(Gradient: 0% to 1% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether) to afford theproduct as a yellow gel. Yield: 15 g, 46 mmol, 67%. ¹H NMR (400 MHz,CDCl₃) δ 7.73 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.30-7.46 (m, 5H), 6.76-6.82 (m, 2H),5.08 (s, 2H), 2.53 (s, 3H), 1.34 (s, 12H).

Step 4. Synthesis of4-[4-(benzyloxy)-2-methylphenyl]-3,5-dimethylfuran-2(5H)-one (C21)

C19 (5.0 g, 19 mmol), C20 (7.48 g, 23.1 mmol),tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (2.22 g, 1.92 mmol) and sodiumcarbonate (4.07 g, 38.4 mmol) were combined in 1,4-dioxane (100 mL) andwater (5 mL), and heated at reflux for 2 hours. The reaction mixture wasfiltered and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. Purification usingsilica gel chromatography (Eluents: 10:1, then 5:1 petroleum ether/ethylacetate) provided the product as a white solid. Yield: 5.8 g, 19 mmol,100%. NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.33-7.49 (m, 5H), 6.98 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H),6.94 (br d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 6.88 (br dd, J=8.3, 2.5 Hz, 1H), 5.20 (qq,J=6.7, 1.8 Hz, 1H), 5.09 (s, 2H), 2.21 (s, 3H), 1.78 (d, J=1.8 Hz, 3H),1.31 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 3H).

Step 5. Synthesis of4-[4-(benzyloxy)-2-methylphenyl]-5-hydroxy-3,5-dimethylfuran-2(5H)-one(C22)

A solution of C21 (5.4 g, 18 mmol) and1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene (DBU, 13.3 g, 87.4 mmol) inacetonitrile (100 mL) was cooled to −60° C. Oxygen was bubbled into thereaction mixture for 20 minutes at −60° C.; the solution was thenstirred at 50° C. for 18 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated invacuo and purified via silica gel chromatography (Eluent: 5:1 petroleumether/ethyl acetate) to provide the product as a colorless oil. Yield:3.5 g, 11 mmol, 61%. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃), characteristic peaks: δ7.33-7.49 (m, 5H), 6.92-6.96 (m, 1H), 6.88 (dd, J=8.5, 2.5 Hz, 1H), 5.09(s, 2H), 2.20 (s, 3H), 1.73 (s, 3H).

Step 6. Synthesis of5-[4-(benzyloxy)-2-methylphenyl]-4,6-dimethylpyridazin-3(2H)-one (C23)

A mixture of C22 (3.5 g, 11 mmol) and hydrazine hydrate (85% in water,1.9 g, 32 mmol) in n-butanol (60 mL) was heated at reflux for 18 hours.After removal of volatiles under reduced pressure, the residue wasstirred with ethyl acetate (20 mL) for 30 minutes, whereupon filtrationprovided the product as a white solid. Yield: 2.0 g, 6.2 mmol, 56%. ¹HNMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 10.93 (br s, 1H), 7.33-7.51 (m, 5H), 6.96 (s,1H), 6.88-6.94 (m, 2H), 5.10 (s, 2H), 2.04 (s, 3H), 1.95 (s, 3H), 1.91(s, 3H).

Step 7. Synthesis of5-[4-(benzyloxy)-2-methylphenyl]-4,6-dimethyl-2-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)pyridazin-3(2H)-one(C24)

A mixture of C23 (1.04 g, 3.25 mmol), 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyran (12.3 g, 1.46mmol) and p-toluenesulfonic acid (59.4 mg, 0.652 mmol) intetrahydrofuran (100 mL) was heated at reflux for 24 hours. The reactionmixture was then concentrated in vacuo and partitioned between ethylacetate and water. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate,filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. Silica gelchromatography (Gradient: 0% to 40% ethyl acetate in heptane) affordedthe product as a gum, presumed to be a mixture of diastereomericatropisomers from the ¹H NMR spectrum. Yield: 560 mg, 1.38 mmol, 42%.LCMS m/z 405.3 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃), characteristic peaks: δ7.33-7.49 (m, 5H), 6.83-6.95 (m, 3H), 6.12-6.17 (m, 1H), 5.09 (s, 2H),4.15-4.24 (m, 1H), 3.76-3.85 (m, 1H), 2.29-2.41 (m, 1H), 2.02 and 2.04(2 s, total 3H), 1.98 and 1.98 (2 s, total 3H), 1.89 and 1.89 (2 s,total 3H).

Step 8. Synthesis of5-(4-hydroxy-2-methylphenyl)-4,6-dimethyl-2-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)pyridazin-3(2H)-one(C25)

Palladium (10% on carbon, 1.16 g, 1.09 mmol) was added to a solution ofC24 (1.47 g, 3.63 mmol) in methanol (30 mL) and ethyl acetate (10 mL),and the mixture was hydrogenated (50 psi) on a Parr shaker for 18 hoursat room temperature. The reaction mixture was filtered through Celite,and the filter pad was rinsed with ethyl acetate; the combined filtrateswere concentrated in vacuo and triturated with heptane, affording theproduct as a white solid, judged to be a mixture of diastereomericatropisomers from the ¹H NMR spectrum. Yield: 1.01 g, 3.21 mmol, 88%. ¹HNMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃), characteristic peaks: δ 6.74-6.85 (m, 3H),6.12-6.17 (m, 1H), 4.15-4.23 (m, 1H), 3.76-3.84 (m, 1H), 2.28-2.41 (m,1H), 1.99 and 2.01 (2 s, total 3H), 1.97 and 1.98 (2 s, total 3H), 1.89and 1.89 (2 s, total 3H).

Step 9. Synthesis of4,6-dimethyl-5-(2-methyl-4-{[1-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yl]oxy}phenyl)-2-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)pyridazin-3(2H)-one(C26)

Cesium carbonate (2.06 g, 6.32 mmol) was added to a solution of P3 (550mg, 2.31 mmol) and C25 (662 mg, 2.10 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (40 mL). Afteraddition of palladium(II) acetate (48 mg, 0.21 mmol), the reactionmixture was purged with nitrogen for 10 minutes.Di-tert-butyl[3,4,5,6-tetramethyl-2′,4′,6′-tri(propan-2-yl)biphenyl-2-yl]phosphane(97%, 210 mg, 0.42 mmol) was introduced, and the reaction mixture wasbriefly purged with nitrogen, then heated at 100° C. for 3.5 hours.After the reaction mixture had been cooled and filtered through Celite,the filter pad was thoroughly rinsed with ethyl acetate, and thecombined filtrates were concentrated in vacuo. Silica gel chromatography(Eluents: 10%, then 30%, then 50%, then 90% ethyl acetate in heptane)afforded the product as a tan solid, judged to be a mixture ofdiastereomeric atropisomers from its ¹H NMR spectrum. Yield: 690 mg,1.34 mmol, 58%. LCMS m/z 516.3 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃),characteristic peaks: δ 8.09 (s, 1H), 7.97 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.25 (d,J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.17-7.24 (m, 2H), [7.04 (d, J=8.2 Hz) and 7.00 (d, J=8.2Hz), total 1H], 6.16 (br d, J=10.7 Hz, 1H), 5.72 (dd, J=9.4, 2.5 Hz,1H), 4.16-4.24 (m, 1H), 4.03-4.10 (m, 2H), 3.73-3.85 (m, 2H), 2.48-2.59(m, 1H), 2.29-2.43 (m, 1H), 2.04 (br s, 3H), 1.95 (2 s, total 3H).

Step 10. Synthesis of(+)-4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one(3) and(−)-4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one(4)

C26 (807 mg, 1.56 mmol) was dissolved in 1,4-dioxane (80 mL) anddichloromethane (80 mL). A solution of hydrogen chloride in 1,4-dioxane(4 M, 39.0 mL, 156 mmol) was added, and the reaction mixture was allowedto stir at room temperature for 18 hours. After removal of solvent invacuo, the residue was partitioned between saturated aqueous sodiumbicarbonate solution and ethyl acetate. The aqueous layer was extractedtwice with ethyl acetate, and the combined organic layers were driedover sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure.Trituration with diethyl ether afforded racemic4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-oneas a white solid. Yield: 396 mg, 1.14 mmol, 73%. LCMS m/z 348.1 [M+H⁺].Separation into atropenantiomers was carried out using supercriticalfluid chromatography (Column: Chiral Technologies, Chiralcel OJ-H, 5 μm;Eluent: 1:3 methanol/carbon dioxide). The first-eluting product,obtained as an off-white solid, which exhibited a positive (+) rotation,was designated as compound Example 3. Yield: 155 mg, 0.446 mmol, 28%.LCMS m/z 348.2 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CD₃OD) δ 8.08 (s, 1H), 7.86 (d,J=6.2 Hz, 1H), 7.26-7.30 (m, 2H), 7.22 (br dd, half of ABX pattern,J=8.2, 2.3 Hz, 1H), 7.17 (d, half of AB quartet, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 2.11 (s,3H), 2.03 (s, 3H), 1.93 (s, 3H). Retention time: 5.47 minutes (Column:Chiral Technologies, Chiralcel OJ-H, 250×4.6 mm, 5 μm; Eluent: 1:3methanol/carbon dioxide; Flow rate: 2.5 mL/minute). The second-elutingproduct, also an off-white solid, which exhibited a negative (−)rotation, was designated as compound Example 4.

Yield: 159 mg, 0.458 mmol, 29%. LCMS m/z 348.2 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz,CD₃OD) 8.08 (s, 1H), 7.86 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.26-7.30 (m, 2H), 7.22 (brdd, half of ABX pattern, J=8.2, 2.3 Hz, 1H), 7.17 (d, half of ABquartet, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 2.11 (s, 3H), 2.03 (s, 3H), 1.93 (s, 3H).Retention time: 5.86 minutes (HPLC conditions identical to those usedfor Example 3 above).

Example 54-[4-(4,6-Dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine(5)

Step 1. Synthesis of 5-(4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)-4,6-dimethylpyrimidine(C27)

1,1′-Bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II)-dichloromethanecomplex (5 g, 6 mmol) was added to a degassed mixture of2-(4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)-4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolane (30g, 120 mmol), 5-bromo-4,6-dimethylpyrimidine (22.5 g, 120 mmol), andpotassium phosphate (76.3 g, 359 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (300 mL) and water(150 mL). The reaction mixture was heated at reflux for 4 hours,whereupon it was filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Purification viasilica gel chromatography (Gradient: ethyl acetate in petroleum ether)provided the product as a brown solid. Yield: 25 g, 110 mmol, 92%. LCMSm/z 229.3 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.95 (s, 1H), 6.94 (d, J=8.2Hz, 1H), 6.87-6.89 (m, 1H), 6.84 (dd, J=8.3, 2.5 Hz, 1H), 3.86 (s, 3H),2.21 (s, 6H), 1.99 (s, 3H).

Step 2. Synthesis of 4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenol (C28)

Boron tribromide (3.8 mL, 40 mmol) was added drop-wise to a solution ofC27 (3.0 g, 13 mmol) in dichloromethane (150 mL) at −70° C. The reactionmixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours, then adjusted topH 8 with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution. The aqueouslayer was extracted with dichloromethane (3×200 mL), and the combinedorganic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, andconcentrated in vacuo. Silica gel chromatography (Gradient: 60% to 90%ethyl acetate in petroleum ether) afforded the product as a yellowsolid. Yield: 1.2 g, 5.6 mmol, 43%. LCMS m/z 215.0 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.98 (s, 1H), 6.89 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.86 (d, J=2.3 Hz,1H), 6.80 (dd, J=8.3, 2.5 Hz, 1H), 2.24 (s, 6H), 1.96 (s, 3H).

Step 3. Synthesis of4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1-{[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl}-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine(C29)

To a mixture of C28 (390 mg, 1.82 mmol) and 1,4-dioxane (10 mL) wasadded P1 (566 mg, 2.0 mmol), palladium(II) acetate (40 mg, 0.18 mmol),1,1′-binaphthalene-2,2′-diylbis(diphenylphosphane) (224 mg, 0.360 mmol)and cesium carbonate (1.76 g, 5.40 mmol). The reaction mixture wasstirred at 120° C. for 2 hours, whereupon it was cooled to roomtemperature, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. Silica gelchromatography (Eluent: 70:1 dichloromethane/methanol) provided theproduct as a red oil. Yield: 620 mg, 1.35 mmol, 74%.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CD₃OD) δ 8.89 (s, 1H), 7.81 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.43 (d,J=3.3 Hz, 1H), 7.39 (br d, J=6 Hz, 1H), 7.18-7.20 (m, 1H), 7.15 (d, halfof AB quartet, J=8.3 Hz, 1H), 7.11 (dd, half of ABX pattern, J=8.3, 2.3Hz, 1H), 6.60 (d, J=3.3 Hz, 1H), 5.60 (s, 2H), 3.52-3.58 (m, 2H), 2.28(s, 6H), 2.02 (s, 3H), 0.85-0.91 (m, 2H), −0.06 (s, 9H).

Step 4. Synthesis of{4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-1-yl}methanol(C30)

A solution of C29 (430 mg, 0.93 mmol) in trifluoroacetic acid (3 mL) wasstirred at 80° C. for 1 hour. After cooling to room temperature, themixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo.Chromatography on silica gel (Gradient: 3% to 9% methanol indichloromethane) provided the product as a yellow solid. Yield: 330 mg,0.92 mmol, 99%.

Step 5. Synthesis of4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine(5)

To a solution of C30 (330 mg, 0.92 mmol) in methanol (8 mL) was addedethane-1,2-diamine (300 mg, 5.0 mmol), and the reaction mixture wasstirred at 45° C. for 1 hour. After cooling to room temperature, themixture was concentrated in vacuo and purified using silica gelchromatography (Eluent: 20:1 dichloromethane/methanol) to afford theproduct as a white solid. Yield: 256 mg, 0.775 mmol, 84%. LCMS m/z 331.1[M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CD₃OD) δ 8.89 (s, 1H), 7.73 (d, J=5.8 Hz, 1H),7.32 (d, J=3.0 Hz, 1H), 7.23 (dd, J=5.9, 0.9 Hz, 1H), 7.17 (br d, J=2Hz, 1H), 7.13 (d, half of AB quartet, J=8.3 Hz, 1H), 7.09 (br dd, halfof ABX pattern, J=8.2, 2.4 Hz, 1H), 6.52 (dd, J=3.3, 0.8 Hz, 1H), 2.28(s, 6H), 2.02 (br s, 3H).

Example 64-[4-(4,6-Dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine(6)

Step 1. Synthesis of4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine(C31)

Cesium carbonate (1.03 g, 3.16 mmol) and palladium(II) acetate (24 mg,0.11 mmol) were added to a solution of C28 (225 mg, 1.05 mmol) and P3(250 mg, 1.05 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (10 mL) in a sealable reactionvessel, and the solution was purged with nitrogen for 10 minutes.Di-tert-butyl[3,4,5,6-tetramethyl-2′,4′,6′-tri(propan-2-yl)biphenyl-2-yl]phosphane(97%, 104 mg, 0.210 mmol) was added, and the reaction mixture wasbriefly purged with nitrogen. The vessel was sealed and the reactionmixture was stirred at 100° C. for 3 hours. After cooling to roomtemperature, the mixture was filtered through Celite and the filter padwas washed with ethyl acetate; the combined filtrates were concentratedin vacuo and purified via silica gel chromatography (Eluents: 20%, then50%, then 100% ethyl acetate in heptane). The product was obtained as anoff-white solid. Yield: 272 mg, 0.655 mmol, 62%. LCMS m/z 416.5 [M+H⁺].

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.99 (s, 1H), 8.11 (d, J=0.6 Hz, 1H), 7.99 (d,J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.25-7.27 (m, 2H, assumed; partially obscured by solventpeak), 7.20-7.24 (m, 1H), 7.10 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 5.73 (dd, J=9.4, 2.5Hz, 1H), 4.04-4.10 (m, 1H), 3.74-3.82 (m, 1H), 2.49-2.59 (m, 1H), 2.28(s, 6H), 2.08-2.21 (m, 2H), 2.04 (s, 3H), 1.66-1.84 (s, 3H).

Step 2. Synthesis of4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine(6)

C31 (172 mg, 0.414 mmol) was dissolved in 1,4-dioxane (5 mL) anddichloromethane (5 mL), and cooled to 0° C. A solution of hydrogenchloride in 1,4-dioxane (4 M, 1.04 mL, 4.16 mmol) was added, and thereaction mixture was allowed to stir at room temperature for 45 hours.After removal of solvent in vacuo, the residue was partitioned betweensaturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution and dichloromethane. Theaqueous layer was extracted twice with dichloromethane, and the combinedorganic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, andconcentrated under reduced pressure, affording the product as anoff-white solid.

Yield: 130 mg, 0.392 mmol, 95%. LCMS m/z 332.3 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz,CDCl₃) δ 9.00 (s, 1H), 8.20 (brs, 1H), 7.99 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.28-7.30(m, 1H), 7.23-7.27 (m, 1H), 7.16 (dd, J=6.0, 1.0 Hz, 1H), 7.11 (d, J=8.2Hz, 1H), 2.28 (s, 6H), 2.05 (s, 3H).

Example 74,6-Dimethyl-5-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one(7)

Step 1. Synthesis of tert-butyl4-{4-[3,5-dimethyl-6-oxo-1-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)-1,6-dihydropyridazin-4-yl]phenoxy}-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-1-carboxylate(C32)

A mixture of5-(4-hydroxyphenyl)-4,6-dimethyl-2-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)pyridazin-3(2H)-one(prepared in a manner analogous to C25 in Examples 3 and 4) (600 mg,2.00 mmol), P2 (757 mg, 3.00 mmol), cesium carbonate (1.95 g, 5.99mmol), palladium(II) acetate (44 mg, 0.20 mmol) anddi-tert-butyl[3,4,5,6-tetramethyl-2′,4′,6′-tri(propan-2-yl)biphenyl-2-yl]phosphane(97%, 200 mg, 0.40 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (15 mL) was purged with nitrogenfor 10 minutes, and then heated at 80° C. for 18 hours. Afterfiltration, the filtrate was diluted with water and extracted severaltimes with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers were washed withwater, washed with saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution, driedover magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo.Purification via silica gel chromatography (Gradient: 25% to 50% ethylacetate in heptane) provided the product as a white solid. Yield: 860mg, 1.66 mmol, 83%. LCMS m/z 517.1 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃),characteristic peaks: δ 8.04 (d, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.80 (br d, J=5.8 Hz,1H), 7.62 (d, J=3.7 Hz, 1H), 7.31-7.36 (m, 2H), 7.11-7.19 (m, 2H), 6.75(dd, J=3.7, 0.6 Hz, 1H), 6.15 (dd, J=10.7, 2.0 Hz, 1H), 4.15-4.21 (m,1H), 3.76-3.84 (m, 1H), 2.29-2.41 (m, 1H), 2.12 (s, 3H), 2.01 (s, 3H),1.71 (s, 9H).

Step 2. Synthesis of4,6-dimethyl-5-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one(7)

Trifluoroacetic acid (5 mL) was added to a solution of C32 (850 mg, 1.64mmol) in dichloromethane (15 mL), and the reaction mixture was allowedto stir at room temperature for 18 hours. After removal of volatilesunder reduced pressure, the residue was dissolved in saturated aqueoussodium bicarbonate solution and extracted several times with ethylacetate. The combined organic layers were washed with water, washed withsaturated aqueous sodium chloride solution, dried over magnesiumsulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The resulting material wassuspended in ethyl acetate, stirred for 10 minutes and filtered,affording the product as a white solid. Yield: 280 mg, 0.842 mmol, 51%.LCMS m/z 333.1 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.77 (br s, 1H),11.69 (br s, 1H), 7.72 (d, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.43 (dd, J=3.2, 2.3 Hz, 1H),7.29 (s, 4H), 7.20 (dd, J=5.8, 0.9 Hz, 1H), 6.55 (ddd, J=3.2, 2.0, 0.9Hz, 1H), 1.97 (s, 3H), 1.83 (s, 3H).

Example 8(−)-1,5-Dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione (8)

Step 1. Synthesis of 6-amino-1,5-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H, 3H)-dione,hydrochloride salt (C33)

A solution of sodium methoxide in methanol (4.4 M, 27 mL, 119 mmol) wasadded to a solution of ethyl 2-cyanopropanoate (95%, 13.2 mL, 99.6 mmol)and 1-methylurea (98%, 8.26 g, 109 mmol) in methanol (75 mL), and thereaction mixture was heated at reflux for 18 hours, then cooled to roomtemperature. After removal of solvent in vacuo, the residue wasrepeatedly evaporated under reduced pressure with acetonitrile (3×50mL), then partitioned between acetonitrile (100 mL) and water (100 mL).Aqueous 6 M hydrochloric acid was slowly added until the pH had reachedapproximately 2; the resulting mixture was stirred for one hour. Theprecipitate was collected via filtration and washed with tert-butylmethyl ether, affording the product as a white solid. Yield: 15.2 g,79.3 mmol, 80%. LCMS m/z 156.1 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 10.38(br s, 1H), 6.39 (s, 2H), 3.22 (s, 3H), 1.67 (s, 3H).

Step 2. Synthesis of 6-bromo-1,5-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione(C34)

A 1:1 mixture of acetonitrile and water (120 mL) was added to a mixtureof C33 (9.50 g, 49.6 mmol), sodium nitrite (5.24 g, 76 mmol), andcopper(II) bromide (22.4 g, 100 mmol), and the reaction mixture wasallowed to stir at room temperature for 66 hours. Addition of aqueoussulfuric acid (1 N, 200 mL) and ethyl acetate (100 mL) provided aprecipitate, which was collected via filtration and washed with waterand ethyl acetate to afford the product as a light yellow solid (7.70g). The organic layer of the filtrate was concentrated to a smallervolume, during which additional precipitate formed; this was isolatedvia filtration and washed with 1:1 ethyl acetate/heptane to provideadditional product (0.4 g). Total yield: 8.1 g, 37 mmol, 75%.

LCMS m/z 217.9 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.58 (br s, 1H),3.45 (s, 3H), 1.93 (s, 3H).

Step 3. Synthesis of6-bromo-3-(3,4-dimethoxybenzyl)-1,5-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione(C35)

1,8-Diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene (98%, 5.57 mL, 36.5 mmol) was addedto a suspension of C34 (4.00 g, 18.3 mmol) and4-(chloromethyl)-1,2-dimethoxybenzene (5.16 g, 27.6 mmol) inacetonitrile (80 mL), and the reaction mixture was heated at 60° C. for18 hours. After removal of solvent in vacuo, the residue was purifiedvia silica gel chromatography (Gradient: 25% to 50% ethyl acetate inheptane) to afford the product as a white solid. Yield: 5.70 g, 15.4mmol, 84%. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.08-7.12 (m, 2H), 6.80 (d, J=8.0Hz, 1H), 5.07 (s, 2H), 3.88 (s, 3H), 3.85 (s, 3H), 3.65 (s, 3H), 2.14(s, 3H).

Other cuitable protecting groups can also be used to protect the “NH”group of C34. For example, SEM, BOM, or Boc can be used instead of thedimethoxybenzyl in C35.

Step 4. Synthesis of3-(3,4-dimethoxybenzyl)-6-(4-hydroxy-2-methylphenyl)-1,5-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione(C36)

An aqueous solution of potassium carbonate (3.0 M, 3.3 mL, 9.9 mmol) wasadded to a mixture of C35 (1.20 g, 3.25 mmol),(4-hydroxy-2-methylphenyl)boronic acid (988 mg, 6.50 mmol),[1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II),dichloromethane complex (98%, 271 mg, 0.325 mmol) and 1,4-dioxane (30mL). After the reaction mixture had been heated at 100° C. for 66 hours,it was cooled to room temperature, diluted with ethyl acetate and water,and filtered through Celite. The organic layer from the filtrate waswashed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution, washed withsaturated aqueous sodium chloride solution, dried over magnesiumsulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. Purification using silicagel chromatography (Gradient: 25% to 50% ethyl acetate in heptane)afforded the product as a white foam. Yield: 650 mg, 1.64 mmol, 50%.LCMS m/z 397.2 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.22 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H),7.19 (dd, J=8.2, 2.0 Hz, 1H), 6.92 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 6.81-6.84 (m, 2H),6.79 (br dd, J=8.2, 2.5 Hz, 1H), 5.53 (br s, 1H), 5.17 (AB quartet,J_(AB)=13.4 Hz, Δv_(AB)=18.8 Hz, 2H), 3.90 (s, 3H), 3.87 (s, 3H), 3.03(s, 3H), 2.10 (br s, 3H), 1.66 (s, 3H).

Alternatively, the free OH group of (4-hydroxy-2-methylphenyl)boronicacid can be protected by a suitable protecting group (e.g., MOM orbenzyl) before (4-hydroxy-2-methylphenyl)boronic acid is coupled to C35.In such a case, the product of the coupling reaction can be deprotectedto afford C36.

Step 5. Synthesis of3-(3,4-dimethoxybenzyl)-1,5-dimethyl-6-(2-methyl-4-{[1-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yl]oxy}phenyl)pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione(C37)

C36 was converted to the product using the method employed for synthesisof C26 in Examples 3 and 4. In this case, after filtration throughCelite and rinsing of the filter pad with ethyl acetate, the organiclayer of the combined filtrates was washed with water, washed withsaturated aqueous sodium chloride solution, dried over sodium sulfate,filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. Purification via silica gelchromatography (Gradient: 50% to 100% ethyl acetate in heptanes)provided the product as a tan solid. Yield: 490 mg, 0.820 mmol, 63%.

LCMS m/z 598.3 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃), characteristic peaks: δ8.06-8.08 (m, 1H), 7.99 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 1H), 7.32 (dd, J=6.2, 0.9 Hz, 1H),7.24 (br d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.21 (br dd, J=8.1, 2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.15 (d,J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 6.84 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 5.74 (dd, J=9.2, 2.5 Hz, 1H),5.18 (AB quartet, J_(AB)=13.4 Hz, Δv_(AB)=19.1 Hz, 2H), 4.03-4.09 (m,1H), 3.92 (s, 3H), 3.88 (s, 3H), 3.74-3.82 (m, 1H), 3.11 (s, 3H), 2.21(br s, 3H), 1.71 (s, 3H).

Step 6. Synthesis of(−)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione (8)

C37 (490 mg, 0.820 mmol), trifluoroacetic acid (8 mL) and methoxybenzene(0.446 mL, 4.10 mmol) were combined in a pressure tube; the tube wassealed and the reaction mixture was heated at 120° C. for 42 hours.After cooling to room temperature, the reaction mixture was concentratedin vacuo and partitioned between ethyl acetate (100 mL) and saturatedaqueous sodium bicarbonate solution (20 mL). The organic layer waswashed sequentially with water (10 mL) and with saturated aqueous sodiumchloride solution (10 mL), dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, andconcentrated under reduced pressure. After chromatography on silica gel(Gradient: 65% to 100% ethyl acetate in heptane), the product wassubjected to supercritical fluid chromatography on a chiral column. Oneatropenantiomer was collected, providing the product as a solid; thismaterial exhibited a negative (−) rotation. Yield: 95 mg, 0.26 mmol,32%.

LCMS m/z 364.2 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.33 (br s, 1H), 8.24(br s, 1H), 7.98 (d, J=6.1 Hz, 1H), 7.27-7.32 (m, 2H, assumed; partiallyobscured by solvent peak), 7.19 (dd, J=6.1, 1.0 Hz, 1H), 7.18 (br d, J=8Hz, 1H), 3.08 (s, 3H), 2.23 (br s, 3H), 1.70 (s, 3H)

Examples 9 and 104,6-Dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one,ENT-1 (9) and4,6-Dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one,ENT-2 (10)

Step 1. Synthesis of4,6-dimethyl-5-{2-methyl-4-[(1-{[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl}-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yl)oxy]phenyl}-2-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)pyridazin-3(2H)-one(C38)

C25 was reacted with P1 using the method described for synthesis of C31in Example 6. The product, assigned as a mixture of diastereomericatropisomers on the basis of its ¹H NMR spectrum, was obtained as asolid. Yield: 53 mg, 94 μmol, 27%. LCMS m/z 561.4 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400MHz, CDCl₃), characteristic peaks: δ 7.98 (br d, J=6 Hz, 1H), 6.96-7.04(m, 1H), 6.13-6.18 (m, 1H), 5.51 (s, 2H), 4.16-4.24 (m, 1H), 3.77-3.85(m, 1H), 3.48-3.54 (m, 2H), 2.04 (2 s, total 3H), 1.95 (2 s, total 3H),0.89-0.94 (m, 2H), −0.03 (s, 9H).

Step 2. Synthesis of4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one,ENT-1 (9) and4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one,ENT-2 (10)

Trifluoroacetic acid (1 mL) was added to a solution of C38 (53 mg, 94μmol) in dichloromethane (3 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred atroom temperature for 18 hours. The solution was partitioned betweenethyl acetate and saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution; theaqueous layer was extracted three times with ethyl acetate, and thecombined organic layers were combined, dried, filtered, and concentratedin vacuo. The residue was taken up in tetrahydrofuran (5 mL) and water(1 mL), treated with potassium hydroxide (300 mg, 5.3 mmol), and stirredat room temperature for 18 hours. The reaction mixture was thenpartitioned between ethyl acetate and saturated aqueous ammoniumchloride solution; the aqueous layer was extracted three times withethyl acetate, and the combined organic layers were dried, filtered, andconcentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting solid (40 mg) wassubjected to supercritical fluid chromatography (Column: ChiralTechnologies, Chiralpak AS-H, 5 μm, Eluent: 7:3 carbondioxide/methanol). The first-eluting atropenantiomer, isolated as asolid, was designated as compound 9. Yield: 8 mg, 20 μmol, 20%. LCMS m/z347.1 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CD₃OD) δ 7.78 (br d, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.36(d, J=3.1 Hz, 1H), 7.31 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.20-7.22 (m, 1H), 7.10-7.16(m, 2H), 6.39 (d, J=3.1 Hz, 1H), 2.08 (s, 3H), 2.02 (s, 3H), 1.92 (s,3H). Retention time: 4.07 minutes (Column: Chiral Technologies,Chiralpak AS-H, 4.6×250 mm, 5 μm; Eluent: 5% methanol in carbon dioxidefor 1.0 minute, followed by a gradient of 5% to 50% methanol in carbondioxide over 6.0 minutes; Flow rate: 4.0 mL/minute). The second-elutingatropenantiomer, designated as compound 10, was also obtained as asolid. Yield: 8 mg, 20 μmol, 20%. LCMS m/z 347.2 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400MHz, CD₃OD) δ 7.88 (br d, J=6.4 Hz, 1H), 7.47 (br d, J=6 Hz, 1H), 7.45(d, J=3.3 Hz, 1H), 7.34 (br d, J=2 Hz, 1H), 7.27 (br dd, half of ABXpattern, J=8.3, 2.2 Hz, 1H), 7.21 (d, half of AB quartet, J=8.4 Hz, 1H),6.16 (dd, J=3.3, 0.6 Hz, 1H), 2.11 (s, 3H), 2.02 (s, 3H), 1.92 (s, 3H).Retention time: 5.47 minutes (HPLC conditions identical to thosedescribed for compound 9).

Examples 11 and 124-[4-(3,5-Dimethylpyridazin-4-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine,ENT-1 (11) and4-[4-(3,5-Dimethylpyridazin-4-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine,ENT-2 (12)

Step 1. Synthesis of4,5-dichloro-2-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)pyridazin-3(2H)-one (C39)

A mixture of 4,5-dichloropyridazin-3-ol (42 g, 250 mmol),3,4-dihydro-2H-pyran (168 g, 2.00 mol) and p-toluenesulfonic acid (8.8g, 51 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (2 L) was heated at reflux for 2 days.After cooling to room temperature, the reaction mixture was concentratedin vacuo and purified by silica gel chromatography (Gradient: 3% to 5%ethyl acetate in petroleum ether). The product was obtained as a whitesolid. Yield: 42 g, 170 mmol, 68%. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.84 (s,1H), 6.01 (br d, J=11 Hz, 1H), 4.10-4.16 (m, 1H), 3.70-3.79 (m, 1H),1.99-2.19 (m, 2H), 1.50-1.80 (m, 4H).

Step 2. Synthesis of4-chloro-5-methyl-2-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)pyridazin-3(2H)-one (C40)and 5-chloro-4-methyl-2-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)pyridazin-3(2H)-one(C41)

To a mixture of C39 (40 g, 0.16 mol), methylboronic acid (9.6 g, 0.16mol) and cesium carbonate (156 g, 479 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (500 mL) andwater (50 mL) was added[1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) (5 g, 7mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 110° C. for 2 hours,whereupon it was cooled to room temperature and concentrated in vacuo.Purification via silica gel chromatography (Gradient: 3% to 6% ethylacetate in petroleum ether) afforded compound C40 as a pale yellowsolid. Yield: 9.0 g, 39 mmol, 24%. LCMS m/z 250.8 [M+Na⁺]. ¹H NMR (400MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.71 (s, 1H), 6.07 (dd, J=10.7, 2.1 Hz, 1H), 4.10-4.18 (m,1H), 3.71-3.81 (m, 1H), 2.30 (s, 3H), 1.98-2.19 (m, 2H), 1.53-1.81 (m,4H). Also obtained was C41, as a pale yellow solid. Yield: 9.3 g, 41mmol, 26%. LCMS m/z 250.7 [M+Na⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.77 (s,1H), 6.02 (dd, J=10.7, 2.1 Hz, 1H), 4.10-4.17 (m, 1H), 3.71-3.79 (m,1H), 2.27 (s, 3H), 1.99-2.22 (m, 2H), 1.51-1.79 (m, 4H).

Step 3. Synthesis of4-(4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)-5-methyl-2-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)pyridazin-3(2H)-one(C42)

A degassed aqueous potassium phosphate solution (0.5 M, 4.37 mL, 2.18mmol) was added to a degassed solution of(4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)boronic acid (200 mg, 1.20 mmol), C40 (250 mg,1.09 mmol), and[2′-(azanidyl-κN)biphenyl-2-yl-κC₂](chloro){dicyclohexyl[2′,4′,6′-tri(propan-2-yl)biphenyl-2-yl]-λ⁵-phosphanyl}palladium(22 mg, 28 μmol) in tetrahydrofuran (4 mL). After 4 hours at roomtemperature, the reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate; theorganic layer was washed twice with saturated aqueous sodium chloridesolution, then dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentratedin vacuo. Silica gel chromatography (Eluent: 3:7 ethyl acetate/heptane)afforded the product as a gum. Yield: 290 mg, 0.922 mmol, 85%.

LCMS m/z 315.1 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃), presumed to be a mixtureof diastereomeric atropisomers; δ 7.76 and 7.77 (2 s, total 1H), [6.92(d, J=8.4 Hz) and 6.93 (d, J=8.4 Hz), total 1H], 6.79-6.82 (m, 1H), 6.76(dd, J=8.4, 2.5 Hz, 1H), 6.06 (dd, J=10.7, 2.1 Hz, 1H), 4.09-4.17 (m,1H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.66-3.76 (m, 1H), 2.09-2.26 (m, 1H), 2.08 and 2.08(2 s, total 3H), 1.96-2.05 (m, 1H), 1.93 and 1.94 (2 s, total 3H),1.63-1.80 (m, 3H), 1.48-1.60 (m, 1H).

Step 4. Synthesis of4-(4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)-5-methylpyridazin-3(2H)-one (C43)

C42 (184 mg, 0.585 mmol) was mixed with a solution of hydrogen chloridein 1,4-dioxane (4 M, 8 mL) and allowed to stir for 1 hour. Concentrationin vacuo provided the product as a solid (140 mg), which was takendirectly to the next step. LCMS m/z 231.1 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz,CD₃OD) δ 7.98 (br s, 1H), 6.98 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 6.89 (br d, J=2.5 Hz,1H), 6.84 (br dd, J=8.4, 2.7 Hz, 1H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 2.09 (br s, 3H),2.01 (s, 3H).

Step 5. Synthesis of3-chloro-4-(4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)-5-methylpyridazine (C44)

A mixture of C43 (from the previous step, 140 mg) and phosphorusoxychloride (1.5 mL, 16 mmol) was stirred at 90° C. for 1.5 hours. Afterremoval of the phosphorus oxychloride in vacuo, the residue waspartitioned between dichloromethane (120 mL) and water (20 mL) andneutralized with sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer was washedsequentially with aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution (2×50 mL) andwater (2×50 mL), then dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, andconcentrated under reduced pressure. The product was obtained as a gum.

Yield: 133 mg, 0.535 mmol, 91% over two steps. LCMS m/z 249.1 [M+H⁺]. ¹HNMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 9.03 (s, 1H), 6.94 (d, half of AB quartet, J=8.2Hz, 1H), 6.84-6.91 (m, 2H), 3.87 (s, 3H), 2.11 (s, 3H), 2.03 (s, 3H).

Step 6. Synthesis of 4-(4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)-3,5-dimethylpyridazine(C45)

Nitrogen was bubbled for 10 minutes into a stirring mixture oftetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (32 mg, 28 μmol) and C44 (133mg, 0.535 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (5 mL). Trimethylaluminum (2 M intoluene, 0.5 mL, 1.0 mmol) was then added, and the reaction mixture washeated at 95° C. for 1.5 hours. After cooling, the reaction mixture wasquenched via drop-wise addition of methanol, then diluted with methanol.The mixture was filtered through Celite, and the filtrate wasconcentrated in vacuo. Silica gel chromatography (Eluent: 5% methanol inethyl acetate) afforded the product as an oil. Yield: 94 mg, 0.41 mmol,77%. LCMS m/z 229.1 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.91 (s, 1H),6.78-6.86 (m, 3H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 2.32 (s, 3H), 1.97 (s, 3H), 1.91 (s,3H).

Step 7. Synthesis of 4-(3,5-dimethylpyridazin-4-yl)-3-methylphenol (C46)

Boron tribromide (1 M solution in dichloromethane, 13.0 mL, 13.0 mmol)was added drop-wise to a −78° C. solution of C45 (740 mg, 3.24 mmol) indichloromethane (10 mL). After stirring at −78° C. for 15 minutes, thereaction mixture was gradually warmed to room temperature over 1 hour,and stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. It was then cooled to −78°C., quenched with anhydrous methanol (15 mL), and allowed to warm toroom temperature. Solvents were removed in vacuo, and the residue wastreated with methanol (20 mL) and heated at reflux for 30 minutes. Thereaction mixture was cooled and concentrated under reduced pressure; theresidue was partitioned between dichloromethane and water. The aqueouslayer was adjusted to a pH of 14 with 1 N aqueous sodium hydroxidesolution, then extracted with additional dichloromethane. The aqueouslayer was brought to pH 6-7 by addition of 1 N aqueous hydrochloric acidand stirred for 10 minutes; the resulting precipitate was isolated viafiltration, affording the product as an off-white solid. Yield: 599 mg,2.80 mmol, 86%. LCMS m/z 215.1 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CD₃OD) δ 8.97(s, 1H), 6.74-6.89 (m, 3H), 2.33 (s, 3H), 2.07 (s, 3H), 1.91 (s, 3H).

Step 8. Synthesis of4-[4-(3,5-dimethylpyridazin-4-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1-{[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl}-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine(C47)

C46 was converted to the product using the method described forsynthesis of C15 in Example 2. In this case, purification was carriedout via silica gel chromatography (Mobile phase A: dichloromethane;Mobile phase B: 80:20:1 dichloromethane/methanol/concentrated ammoniumhydroxide solution; Gradient: 0% to 25% B). The product was obtained asa yellow gum. Yield: 67 mg, 0.15 mmol, 65%. LCMS m/z 461.3 [M+H⁺]. ¹HNMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.98 (s, 1H), 7.94 (d, J=5.7 Hz, 1H), 7.16-7.26(m, 4H), 7.00 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 6.68-6.72 (m, 1H), 5.50 (s, 2H),3.47-3.55 (m, 2H), 2.42 (s, 3H), 2.07 (s, 3H), 1.98 (s, 3H), 0.87-0.95(m, 2H), −0.04 (s, 9H).

Step 9. Synthesis of4-[4-(3,5-dimethylpyridazin-4-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine,ENT-1 (11) and4-[4-(3,5-dimethylpyridazin-4-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine,ENT-2 (12)

Tetrabutylammonium fluoride (1 M solution in tetrahydrofuran, 1 mL, 1mmol) was added to a solution of C47 (44.9 mg, 97.5 μmol) intetrahydrofuran (1 mL), and the reaction mixture was heated at 80° C.for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled and extracted with ethylacetate. The combined organic layers were washed with water and withsaturated aqueous sodium chloride solution, then dried over magnesiumsulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. Purification usinghigh-performance liquid chromatography (Column: Princeton Silica, 5 μm;Gradient: 5% to 100% ethanol in heptane) was followed by atropenantiomerseparation via supercritical fluid chromatography (Column: ChiralTechnologies, Chiralpak AS-H, 5 μm; Eluent: 3:1 carbondioxide/methanol). The first-eluting atropenantiomer was designated ascompound II, obtained as a solid. Yield: 4.1 mg, 12 μmol, 12%. LCMS m/z331.2 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.99 (s, 1H), 8.72 (br s, 1H),7.91 (d, J=5.9 Hz, 1H), 7.23-7.27 (m, 2H), 7.21 (br dd, J=8.2, 2.3 Hz,1H), 7.14 (dd, J=5.8, 0.9 Hz, 1H), 7.01 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 6.72-6.74 (m,1H), 2.43 (s, 3H), 2.07 (s, 3H), 1.99 (s, 3H). Retention time: 4.43minutes (Column: Chiral Technologies, Chiralpak AS-H, 250×4.6 mm, 5 μm;Eluent: 3:1 carbon dioxide/methanol; Flow rate: 2.5 mL/minute).

The second-eluting atropenantiomer, designated as compound 12, was alsoobtained as a solid. Yield: 4.5 mg, 14 μmol, 14%. LCMS m/z 331.2 [M+H⁺].¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.99 (s, 1H), 8.73 (br s, 1H), 7.91 (d, J=5.9Hz, 1H), 7.23-7.27 (m, 2H), 7.21 (br dd, J=8.3, 2.4 Hz, 1H), 7.14 (dd,J=5.9, 1.0 Hz, 1H), 7.01 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 6.71-6.74 (m, 1H), 2.43 (s,3H), 2.07 (s, 3H), 1.99 (s, 3H). Retention time: 6.74 minutes (HPLCconditions identical to those described for compound II).

Example 134-[4-(4,6-Dimethyl-1-oxidopyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine(13)

Step 1. Synthesis of4-(4,6-dimethyl-1-oxidopyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenol (C48)

To a solution of 4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenol (1.0 g,4.7 mmol) in dichloromethane (25 mL) was added 3-chloroperoxybenzoicacid (887 mg, 5.14 mmol) at 0° C.

The reaction was stirred at 0° C. for 2 hours, then at room temperaturefor 14 hours. After removal of solvent in vacuo, purification bychromatography on silica gel (Gradient: 0% to 100% ethyl acetate inpetroleum ether) provided the product. Yield: 742 mg, 3.22 mmol, 69%. ¹HNMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 9.03 (s, 1H), 6.82-6.91 (m, 3H), 2.30 (s, 3H),2.22 (s, 3H), 1.97 (s, 3H).

Step 2. Synthesis of4-[4-(4,6-dimethyl-1-oxidopyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine(C49)

To a solution of C48 (230 mg, 1.0 mmol) in acetonitrile (25 mL) wereadded P3 (238 mg, 1.00 mmol) and cesium carbonate (650 mg, 2.0 mmol),and the reaction mixture was stirred at 110° C. for 60 hours. Thereaction mixture was filtered and concentrated in vacuo; silica gelchromatography (Gradient: 0% to 5% methanol in dichloromethane) affordedthe product as a yellow solid. Yield: 290 mg, 0.67 mmol, 67%.

Step 3. Synthesis of4-[4-(4,6-dimethyl-1-oxidopyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine(13)

A solution of hydrogen chloride in 1,4-dioxane (10 mL) was added to C49(290 mg, 0.67 mmol) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred for 2hours at room temperature, and then concentrated in vacuo. The residuewas neutralized with aqueous ammonium hydroxide solution until the pHreached 9. After removal of solvent under reduced pressure, purificationwas carried out via preparative thin layer chromatography on silica gel(Eluent: 10:1 dichloromethane/methanol) to provide the product as awhite solid. Yield: 70 mg, 0.20 mmol, 30%. LCMS m/z 347.9 [M+H⁺]. ¹H NMR(400 MHz, CD₃OD) δ 9.05 (s, 1H), 8.15 (s, 1H), 7.85 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 1H),7.33 (br s, 1H), 7.29 (d, J=5.5 Hz, 1H), 7.24-7.26 (m, 2H), 2.33 (s,3H), 2.30 (s, 3H), 2.09 (s, 3H).

Method A Coupling of N-Protected 4-chloro-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridines or4-chloro-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridines with phenols

Method A describes a specific method for preparations of certaincompounds of the invention.

An N-protected compound of Formula ST-1 wherein Pg¹ is a protectinggroup (e.g., P2 or P3) (0.11 mmol) in degassed 1,4-dioxane (1 mL) wasadded to a phenol of Formula ST-2 (0.1 mmol) in a 2-dram vial. Cesiumcarbonate (˜98 mg, 0.3 mmol), palladium(II) acetate (˜2.5 mg, 10 μmol)anddi-tert-butyl[3,4,5,6-tetramethyl-2′,4′,6′-tri(propan-2-yl)biphenyl-2-yl]phosphane(˜10 mg, 20 μmol) were added, and the reaction mixture was degassedtwice using sequential vacuum and nitrogen fill. The vial was shaken andheated at 80° C. for 20 hours, then cooled to room temperature. Thereaction mixture was partitioned between water (1.5 mL) and ethylacetate (2.5 mL) and filtered through Celite; the organic layer waspassed through a 6 mL solid-phase extraction cartridge filled withsodium sulfate. The aqueous layer was extracted twice via the sameprocedure, and the combined filtrates from the sodium sulfate cartridgeswere concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in dichloromethane(0.5 mL) and treated with hydrogen chloride in 1,4-dioxane (4 M, 0.5 mL,2 mmol). This reaction mixture was shaken at room temperature for 66hours, then diluted with ethyl acetate (2.5 mL) and quenched withaqueous sodium hydroxide solution (6 N, 0.35 mL) and water (1 mL). Theorganic layer was passed through a 6 mL solid-phase extraction cartridgefilled with sodium sulfate. The aqueous layer was extracted twice viathe same procedure, and the combined filtrates from the sodium sulfatecartridges were concentrated in vacuo. Purification was carried outusing reversed phase high-performance liquid chromatography (Column:Waters XBridge C18, 5 μm; Mobile phase A: 0.03% ammonium hydroxide inwater (v/v); Mobile phase B: 0.03% ammonium hydroxide in acetonitrile(v/v); Gradient: 10% to 100% B) to provide the product.

TABLE 1 Examples 14-29

Example Number

Method of Preparation; Non- commercial Starting Materials ¹H NMR (400MHz, CDCl₃), δ (ppm); Mass spectrum, observed ion m/z [M + H⁺] or HPLCretention time (minutes); Mass spectrum m/z [M + H⁺] (unless otherwiseindicated) 14

Example 1^(1,2,3) 9.72 (br s, 1H), 9.07 (s, 1H), 7.88 (d, J = 5.8 Hz,1H), 7.71 (d, J = 1.0 Hz, 1H), 7.32-7.34 (m, 1H), 7.27-7.29 (m, 2H),7.26 (dd, J = 3.1, 2.3 Hz, 1H), 7.15 (dd, J = 5.8, 0.8 Hz, 1H),7.07-7.09 (m, 1H), 6.73-6.76 (m, 1H), 2.34 (s, 3H), 2.03 (s, 3H); 356.015

Example 1⁴ 9.62 (br s, 1H), 9.16 (s, 1H), 7.89 (d, J = 6.0 Hz, 1H),7.81-7.84 (m, 2H), 7.41 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 1H), 7.25-7.34 (m, 4H), 7.14 (d,J = 6.0 Hz, 1H), 6.77- 6.81 (m, 1H), 2.14 (s, 3H); 342.2 16

Example 2; C13 ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CD₃OD) δ 9.19 (s, 1H), 7.79 (d, J = 5.8Hz, 1H), 7.51 (dd, J = 9.3, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.36 (d, J = 3.0 Hz, 1H), 7.30(d, J = 6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.14-7.20 (m, 2H), 6.57 (d, J = 3.3 Hz, 1H), 2.53(s, 3H); 345.9 17

Example 16 ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CD₃OD) δ 9.18 (s, 1H), 7.76 (d, J = 5.8 Hz,1H), 7.31 (d, J = 3.3 Hz, 1H), 7.25-7.28 (m, 2H), 7.20 (br d, J = 2.5Hz, 1H), 7.12 (br dd, J = 8.3, 2.3 Hz, 1H), 6.47 (dd, J = 3.3, 0.8 Hz,1H), 2.44 (s, 3H), 2.10 (br s, 3H); 342.0 18

Example 1^(1,2) 9.10 (s, 1H), 8.68 (br s, 1H), 7.95 (d, J = 5.8 Hz, 1H),7.75 (d, J = 1.0 Hz 1H), 7.46 (dd, J = 8.8, 7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.36-7.38 (m,1H), 7.25-7.32 (m, 3H, assumed; partially obscured by solvent peak),7.21 (dd, J = 5.8, 1.0 Hz, 1H), 6.77-6.79 (m, 1H), 2.46 (s, 3H); 360.119

Example 5^(1,5) 9.11 (br s, 1H), 9.10 (s, 1H), 7.91 (d, J = 5.8 Hz, 1H),7.74 (br s, 1H), 7.49 (s, 4H), 7.40 (br s, 1H), 7.26-7.29 (m, 1H,assumed; partially obscured by solvent peak), 7.18 (br d, J = 5.8 Hz,1H), 6.74-6.78 (m, 1H), 2.46 (s, 3H); 342.0 20

Examples 9 and 10^(6,3) 9.64-9.80 (br m, 1H), 8.94 (s, 1H), 7.85 (br d,J = 5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.36 (br d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H), 7.17- 7.22 (m, 3H), 7.12(br d, J = 5.7 Hz, 1H), 6.65- 6.68 (m, 1H), 2.29 (s, 6H); 317.1 21

Example 5⁷; P2⁸ 9.04 (s, 1H), 8.72 (br s, 1H), 7.91 (d, J = 5.9 Hz, 1H),7.76 (dd, J = 2.5, 0.4 Hz, 1H), 7.66 (dd, J = 8.5, 2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.33(dd, J = 8.5, 0.3 Hz, 1H), 7.29 (dd, J = 3.3, 2.3 Hz, 1H), 7.20 (dd, J =5.9, 1.0 Hz, 1H), 6.76 (ddd, J = 3.3, 2.0, 1.0 Hz, 1H), 2.36 (s, 6H);342.2 22

Example 5^(9,3) ¹H NMR (600 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 8.96 (s, 1H), 7.69 (d, J =5.7 Hz, 1H), 7.55-7.60 (m, 2H), 7.48 (dd, J = 3.1, 2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.23 (brd, J = 6 Hz, 1H), 6.64-6.66 (m, 1H), 2.30 (s, 6H); 353.1 23

Example 6; P2¹⁰ ¹H NMR (600 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 8.98 (s, 1H), 7.69 (d, J =5.7 Hz, 1H), 7.48-7.50 (m, 1H), 7.36- 7.40 (m, 1H), 7.27-7.31 (m, 1H),7.24 (br d, J = 5.7 Hz, 1H), 6.65-6.68 (m, 1H), 2.29 (s, 6H); 353.2 24

Method A 2.02 minutes¹¹; 351.1, 353.1 25

Method A 2.33 minutes¹²; 394.2 26

Example 6; P2, P8¹³ ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CD₃OD) δ 8.09 (s, 1H), 7.73 (d, J =5.9 Hz, 1H), 7.33 (d, J = 3.2 Hz, 1H), 7.23-7.28 (m, 2H), 7.19-7.21 (m,1H), 7.13 (br dd, J = 8.2, 2.3 Hz, 1H), 6.54-6.56 (m, 1H), 3.28 (s, 3H),2.12 (s, 3H), 2.06 (s, 3H); 347.1 27

Example 6; P2, P8¹⁴ ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CD₃OD) δ 8.09 (s, 1H), 7.73 (d, J =5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.33 (d, J = 3.1 Hz, 1H), 7.23-7.28 (m, 2H), 7.19-7.21 (m,1H), 7.13 (br dd, J = 8.5, 2.4 Hz, 1H), 6.54-6.56 (m, 1H), 3.28 (s, 3H),2.13 (s, 3H), 2.06 (s, 3H); 347.1 28

Example 6; P2, C41¹⁵ ¹H NMR (600 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 7.70 (d, J = 5.7 Hz,1H), 7.68 (s, 1H), 7.42 (dd, J = 2.8, 2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.18-7.20 (m, 2H),7.17 (br d, J = 2.2 Hz, 1H), 7.09 (dd, J = 8.3, 2.4 Hz, 1H), 6.54-6.56(m, 1H), 2.11 (s, 3H), 1.86 (s, 3H); 333.0 29

Examples 3 and 4¹⁶ ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CD₃OD) δ 7.72 (d, J = 6.1 Hz, 1H),7.32 (d, J = 3.1 Hz, 1H), 7.23 (dd, J = 6.0, 0.9 Hz, 1H), 7.18 (d, J =8.2 Hz, 1H), 7.10-7.12 (m, 1H), 7.05 (br dd, J = 8.3, 2.4 Hz, 1H), 6.76(d, J = 0.4 Hz, 1H), 6.51 (dd, J = 3.1, 1.0 Hz, 1H), 2.16 (br s, 3H),2.11 (d, J = 0.4 Hz, 3H); 333.2 ¹The requisite5-bromo-6-methylimidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine was prepared via the method of A.R. Harris et al., Tetrahedron 2011, 67, 9063-9066. ²In the penultimatestep, the coupling was carried out usingtetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) and sodium carbonate. ³Thefinal deprotection was effected with tetrabutylammonium fluoride. ⁴Therequisite 4-(imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazin-5-yl)-3-methylphenol was prepared bythe general method used for synthesis of C28 in Example 5. ⁵The finaldeprotection was carried out using trifluoroacetic acid, followed bytreatment with potassium carbonate.⁶4-(4,6-Dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)phenol was prepared using the methoddescribed in Example 5. ⁷The final deprotection was carried out withtrifluoroacetic acid. ⁸5-Bromo-4,6-dimethylpyrimidine was converted to4,6-dimethyl-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyrimidineusing the general method described for preparation of C20 in Examples 3and 4. This compound was converted to the requisite2-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5- yl)-5-hydroxybenzonitrile via Suzukireaction with 2-bromo-5-methoxybenzonitrile and deprotection accordingto the general method given in Example 5 for synthesis of C28. ⁹Therequisite 4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-2,5-difluorophenol was preparedvia Suzuki reaction between (2,5-difluoro-4-methoxyphenyl)boronic acidand 5-bromo-4,6-dimethylpyrimidine, mediated bytetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0), followed by demethylationusing boron tribromide. ¹⁰Suzuki reaction between5-bromo-4,6-dimethylpyrimidine and (2,3-difluoro-4-methoxyphenyl)boronicacid was mediated via tris(dibenzylideneacetone) dipalladium(0) andtricyclohexylphosphine; deprotection with boron tribromide afforded therequisite 4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-2,3-difluorophenol.¹¹Conditions for analytical HPLC. Column: Waters Atlantis dC18, 4.6 x 50mm, 5 μm; Mobile phase A: 0.05% trifluoroacetic acid in water (v/v);Mobile phase B: 0.05% trifluoroacetic acid in acetonitrile (v/v);Gradient: 5.0% to 95% B, linear over 4.0 minutes; Flow rate: 2mL/minute. ¹²Conditions for analytical HPLC. Column: Waters XBridge C18,4.6 x 50 mm, 5 μm; Mobile phase A: 0.03% ammonium hydroxide in water(v/v); Mobile phase B: 0.03% ammonium hydroxide in acetonitrile (v/v);Gradient: 5.0% to 95% B, linear over 4.0 minutes; Flow rate: 2mL/minute). ¹³The racemic product was separated using supercriticalfluid chromatography (Column: Chiral Technologies Chiralcel OJ-H, 5 μm;Eluent: 1:4 methanol/ carbon dioxide). Atropenantiomer Example 26 wasthe first-eluting isomer, exhibiting a negative (−) rotation, and aretention time of 4.28 minutes (Column: Chiral Technologies ChiralcelOJ-H, 4.6 x 250 mm, 5 μm; Eluent: 1:4 methanol/carbon dioxide; Flow rate2.5 mL/min). ¹⁴The racemic product was separated as described infootnote 13. Atropenantiomer Example 27 was the second-eluting isomer,exhibiting a positive (+) rotation and a retention time of 4.97 minutes(analytical conditions identical to those in footnote 13). ¹⁵CompoundC41 was reacted with C20, using conditions similar to those employed forpreparation of C27 in Example 5. The resulting 5-[4-(benzyloxy)-2-methylphenyl]-4-methyl-2-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)pyridazin-3(2H)-onewas hydrogenated to provide 5-(4-hydroxy-2-methylphenyl)-4-methyl-2-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)pyridazin-3(2H)-one.¹⁶2-Methyl-5-oxo-2,5-dihydrofuran-3-yl trifluoromethanesulfonate wasprepared from ethyl 4-bromo-3-oxopentanoate using the general methodsoutlined for preparation of C19 in Examples 3 and 4.

TABLE 2 Examples 30-43

Example Number

Method of Preparation; Non- commercial Starting Materials ¹H NMR (400MHz, CDCl₃), δ (ppm); Mass spectrum, observed ion m/z [M + H⁺] or HPLCretention time (minutes); Mass spectrum m/z [M + H⁺] (unless otherwiseindicated) 30

Examples 11 and 12¹; P6² ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃), δ 9.10 (s, 1H), 8.41(d, J = 5.5 Hz, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 7.94 (d, J = 6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.40 (br d,J = 2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.35 (br dd, half of ABX pattern, J = 8.5, 2.4 Hz, 1H),7.30 (d, half of AB quartet, J = 8.6 Hz, 1H), 7.25-7.29 (m, 1H, assumed;partially obscured by solvent peak), 7.01 (dd, J = 5.5, 0.8 Hz, 1H),2.49 (s, 3H), 2.00 (s, 3H); 357.2 31

Examples 3 and 4³ 8.11 (br s, 1H), 7.83 (d, J = 6.3 Hz, 1H), 7.23- 7.28(m, 3H), 7.17-7.21 (m, 1H), 6.79-6.80 (m, 1H), 2.20 (br s, 3H), 2.13 (d,J = 0.4 Hz, 3H); 334.2 32

Example 5; P6⁴ ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃), δ 9.00 (s, 1H), 8.27 (s, 1H),8.00 (d, J = 6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.19-7.28 (m, 4H, assumed; partially obscuredby solvent peak), 2.38 (s, 6H); 336.1 33

Example 5; P6⁵ 9.27 (s, 1H), 8.08 (d, J = 6.5 Hz, 1H), 7.62-7.69 (m,1H), 7.58 (s, 1H), 7.45-7.55 (m, 2H), 7.27- 7.33 (m, 1H), 3.84 (s, 3H),2.55 (s, 6H); 348.1 34

Example 5⁶; P6⁷ ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃), δ 9.05 (s, 1H), 8.30 (d, J =0.8 Hz, 1H), 7.97 (d, J = 6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.84 (d, J = 2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.70(dd, J = 8.5, 2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.39 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.24 (dd, J = 6.0,1.0 Hz, 1H), 2.37 (s, 6H); 343.1 35

Example 5⁸; P3⁹ ¹H NMR (600 MHz, DMSO-d₆), δ 9.33 (s, 1H), 8.31 (br s,1H), 7.91 (dd, J = 5.9, 0.4 Hz, 1H), 7.73 (dd, J = 8.6, 8.6 Hz, 1H),7.56 (dd, J = 10.8, 2.2 Hz, 1H), 7.39 (dd, J = 8.4, 2.2 Hz, 1H), 7.36(br d, J = 5.9 Hz, 1H), 2.48 (s, 3H); 347.2 36

Method A 2.33 minutes; 350.1¹⁰ 37

Method A 2.40 minutes; 352.1¹⁰ 38

Example 5; P6 ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃), δ 8.97 (s, 1H), 8.23 (s, 1H),7.98 (d, J = 6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.42 (br d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H), 7.24-7.29 (m, 2H,assumed; partially obscured by solvent peak), 7.17 (d, J = 6.0 Hz, 1H),2.35 (s, 6H); 318.1 39

Example 6; P8¹¹ 8.18 (s, 1H), 8.10 (s, 1H), 7.85 (d, J = 6.2 Hz, 1H),7.32-7.36 (m, 2H), 7.25-7.30 (m, 2H), 3.29 (s, 3H), 2.16 (s, 3H), 2.07(s, 3H); 348.4 40

Example 6; P8¹² 8.17-8.18 (m, 1H), 8.10 (s, 1H), 7.85 (d, J = 6.1 Hz,1H), 7.32-7.36 (m, 2H), 7.25-7.30 (m, 2H), 3.29 (s, 3H), 2.16 (s, 3H),2.07 (s, 3H); 348.4 41

Examples 3 and 4 8.12 (s, 1H), 7.86 (d, J = 6.2 Hz, 1H), 7.37 (br ABquartet, J_(AB) = 8.6 Hz, Δν_(AB) = 28 Hz, 4H), 7.28 (d, J = 5.8 Hz,1H), 2.11 (s, 3H), 1.99 (s, 3H); 334.2 42

Examples 3 and 4^(13,14) ¹H NMR (600 MHz, DMSO-d₆), δ 8.23 (br s, 1H),7.84 (d, J = 6.2 Hz, 1H), 7.72 (s, 1H), 7.26- 7.30 (m, 2H), 7.25 (d,half of AB quartet, J = 7.9 Hz, 1H), 7.19 (dd, half of ABX pattern, J =7.9, 2.2 Hz, 1H), 2.13 (s, 3H), 1.86 (s, 3H); 334.0 43

Example 8 8.18 (d, J = 1.0 Hz, 1H), 7.85 (d, J = 6.1 Hz, 1H), 7.42-7.47(m, 4H), 7.29 (dd, J = 6.1, 1.0 Hz, 1H), 3.11 (s, 3H), 1.71 (s, 3H);350.2 ¹In the penultimate step, the coupling was carried out using4,5-bis(diphenylphosphino)-9,9-dimethylxanthene rather thandi-tert-butyl[3,4,5,6-tetramethyl-2′,4′,6′-tri(propan-2-yl)biphenyl-2-yl]phosphane. ²The requisite3-methyl-4-(2-methyl-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridin-1-yl)phenol was preparedin the following manner: reaction of 4-methoxy-2-methylaniline with4-chloro-3-nitropyridine providedN-(4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)-3-nitropyridin-4-amine. After hydrogenationof the nitro group, the resulting amine was cyclized with ethylorthoacetate and acetic anhydride to afford1-(4-methoxy-2-methylphenyl)-2-methyl-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine, whichwas demethylated with boron tribromide.³2-Methyl-5-oxo-2,5-dihydrofuran-3-yl trifluoromethanesulfonate wasprepared from ethyl 4-bromo-3-oxopentanoate using the general methodsoutlined for preparation of C19 in Examples 3 and 4.⁴1-Bromo-2-fluoro-4-methoxybenzene was converted to intermediate5-(2-fluoro-4-methoxyphenyl)-4,6-dimethylpyrimidine using the proceduredescribed for synthesis of C14 in Example 1. ⁵4-Bromo-3-methoxyphenolwas protected as its [tri(propan-2-yl)]silane ether, and subsequentlyconverted to [3-methoxy-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)phenoxy][tri(propan-2-yl)]silane with[1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) catalyst.This was reacted with 5-bromo- 4,6-dimethylpyrimidine using theconditions described for synthesis of C27 in Example 5 to afford5-(2-methoxy-4-{[tri(propan-2-yl)silyl]oxy}phenyl)-4,6-dimethylpyrimidine; deprotection with tetraethylammonium fluorideprovided the requisite 4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methoxyphenol.⁶The final deprotection was carried out with trifluoroacetic acid,followed by treatment with sodium acetate in methanol.⁷2-Bromo-5-hydroxybenzonitrile was protected as its[tri(propan-2-yl)]silane ether. Reaction with4,6-dimethyl-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl) pyrimidine(prepared from 5-bromo-4,6-dimethylpyrimidine using the conditionsdescribed for synthesis of C13 in Example 1) according to the methodused for preparation of C14 in Example 1 provided the requisite2-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-5-hydroxybenzonitrile. ⁸The finaldeprotection was carried out with hydrochloric acid.⁹5-Bromo-6-methylpyrimidine-4-carbonitrile was prepared from5-bromo-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine via reaction with potassium cyanideand 1,4,7,10,13, 16-hexaoxacyclooctadecane. 4-Bromo-3-fluorophenol wasconverted to[3-fluoro-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)phenoxy][tri(propan-2-yl)]silane using the conditions outlined in footnote 5. These two reagentswere subjected to Suzuki reaction and desilylation as described infootnote 5, affording5-(2-fluoro-4-hydroxyphenyl)-6-methylpyrimidine-4-carbonitrile.¹⁰Conditions for analytical HPLC. Column: Waters Atlantis dC18, 4.6 × 50mm, 5 μm; Mobile phase A: 0.05% trifluoroacetic acid in water (v/v);Mobile phase B: 0.05% trifluoroacetic acid in acetonitrile (v/v);Gradient: 5.0% to 95% B, linear over 4.0 minutes; Flow rate: 2mL/minute. ¹¹The racemic product was separated using supercritical fluidchromatography (Column: Chiral Technologies Chiralcel OJ-H, 5 μm;Eluent: 1:4 methanol/carbon dioxide). Atropenantiomer Example 39 was thefirst-eluting isomer, exhibiting a negative (−) rotation, and aretention time of 2.91 minutes (Column: Chiral Technologies ChiralcelOJ-H, 4.6 × 250 mm, 5 μm; Eluent: 1:4 methanol/carbon dioxide; Flow rate2.5 mL/min). ¹²The racemic product was separated as described infootnote 11. Atropenantiomer Example 40 was the second-eluting isomer,exhibiting a positive (+) rotation and a retention time of 3.28 minutes(analytical conditions identical to those in footnote 11). ¹³In thepenultimate step, the coupling was carried out using copper(I) iodideand cesium carbonate in pyridine at 100° C. ¹⁴Compound C41 was reactedwith C20, using conditions similar to those employed for preparation ofC27 in Example 5. The resulting 5-[4-(benzyloxy)-2-methylphenyl]-4-methyl-2-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)pyridazin-3(2H)-onewas hydrogenated to provide 5-(4-hydroxy-2-methylphenyl)-4-methyl-2-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)pyridazin-3(2H)-one.

TABLE 3 Examples 44-47 Method of Preparation; Non- commercial ExampleStarting ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃), δ (ppm); Number Structure MaterialsMass spectrum, observed ion m/z [M + H⁺] 44

Example 5; P7¹ 9.44 (br s, 1H), 8.98 (s, 1H), 8.00 (d, J = 5.5 Hz, 1H),7.79 (br d, J = 2 Hz, 1H), 7.32-7.35 (m, 1H), 7.27-7.31 (m, 1H, assumed;partially obscured by solvent peak), 7.16 (d, J = 5.5 Hz, 1H), 7.09 (d,J = 8.0 Hz, 1H), 2.27 (s, 6H), 2.04 (s, 3H); 355.9 45

Example 3 and 4² 7.78 (d, J = 6.2 Hz, 1H), 7.35 (br AB quartet, J_(AB) =8.7 Hz, Δν_(AB) = 25.9 Hz, 4H), 7.18 (d, J = 6.2 Hz, 1H), 2.73 (s, 3H),2.10 (s, 3H), 1.99 (s, 3H); 348.3 46

Examples 3 and 4; P4 7.79 (d, J = 0.6 Hz, 1H), 7.37 (br AB quartet,J_(AB) = 8.8 Hz, Δν_(AB) = 34.9 Hz, 4H), 7.09-7.11 (m, 1H), 2.47 (d, J =0.8 Hz, 3H), 2.10 (s, 3H), 1.99 (s, 3H); 348.1 47

Example 3 and 4; P5 ¹H NMR (600 MHz, DMSO-d₆), δ 8.16 (br s, 1H), 7.50(s, 1H), 7.32 (br AB quartet, J_(AB) = 8.3 Hz, Δν_(AB) = 19.3 Hz, 4H),3.97 (s, 3H), 1.97 (s, 3H), 1.83 (s, 3H); 364.0 ¹The final deprotectionwas carried out with trifluoroacetic acid, followed by treatment withsodium acetate in methanol.²4-Chloro-3-methyl-1-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridinewas prepared using the method described in Preparation P3.

Example AA Human D1 Receptor Binding Assay and Data

The affinity of the compounds described herein was determined bycompetition binding assays similar to those described in Ryman-Rasmussenet al., “Differential activation of adenylate cyclase and receptorinternalization by novel dopamine D1 receptor agonists”, MolecularPharmacology 68(4):1039-1048 (2005). This radioligand binding assay used[³H]-SCH23390, a radiolabeled D1 ligand, to evaluate the ability of atest compound to compete with the radioligand when binding to a D1receptor.

D1 binding assays were performed using over-expressing LTK human celllines. To determine basic assay parameters, ligand concentrations weredetermined from saturation binding studies where the K_(d) for[³H]-SCH23390 was found to be 1.3 nM. From tissue concentration curvestudies, the optimal amount of tissue was determined to be 1.75 mg/mLper 96 well plate using 0.5 nM of [³H]-SCH23390. These ligand and tissueconcentrations were used in time course studies to determine linearityand equilibrium conditions for binding. Binding was at equilibrium withthe specified amount of tissue in 30 minutes at 37° C. From theseparameters, K_(i) values were determined by homogenizing the specifiedamount of tissue for each species in 50 mM Tris (pH 7.4 at 4° C.)containing 2.0 mM MgCl₂ using a Polytron and spun in a centrifuge at40,000×g for 10 minutes. The pellet was resuspended in assay buffer [50mM Tris (pH 7.4@RT) containing 4 mM MgSO₄ and 0.5 mM EDTA]. Incubationswere initiated by the addition of 200 μL of tissue to 96-well platescontaining test drugs (2.5 μL) and 0.5 nM [³H]-SCH23390 (50 μL) in afinal volume of 250 μL. Non-specific binding was determined byradioligand binding in the presence of a saturating concentration of(+)-Butaclamol (10 μM), a D1 antagonist. After a 30 minute incubationperiod at 37° C., assay samples were rapidly filtered throughUnifilter-96 GF/B PEI-coated filter plates and rinsed with 50 mM Trisbuffer (pH 7.4 at 4° C.). Membrane bound [³H]-SCH23390 levels weredetermined by liquid scintillation counting of the filterplates inEcolume. The IC₅₀ value (concentration at which 50% inhibition ofspecific binding occurs) was calculated by linear regression of theconcentration-response data in Microsoft Excel. K_(i) values werecalculated according to the Cheng-Prusoff equation:

$K_{i} = \frac{{IC}_{50}}{1 + \left( {\lbrack L\rbrack/K_{d}} \right)}$

where [L]=concentration of free radioligand and K_(d)=dissociationconstant of radioligand for D1 receptor (1.3 nM for [³H]-SCH23390).

Example BB D1 cAMP HTRF Assay and Data

The D1 cAMP (Cyclic Adenosine Monophosphate) HTRF (HomogeneousTime-Resolved Fluorescence) Assay used and described herein is acompetitive immunoassay between native cAMP produced by cells and cAMPlabeled with XL-665. This assay was used to determine the ability of atest compound to agonize (including partially agonize) D1. A Mabanti-cAMP labeled Cryptate visualizes the tracer. The maximum signal isachieved if the samples do not contain free cAMP due to the proximity ofdonor (Eu-cryptate) and acceptor (XL665) entities. The signal,therefore, is inversely proportional to the concentration of cAMP in thesample. A time-resolved and ratiometric measurement (em 665 nm/em 620nm) minimizes the interference with medium. cAMP HTRF assays arecommercially available, for example, from Cisbio Bioassays, IBA group.

Materials and Methods

Materials:

The cAMP Dynamic kit was obtained from Cisbio International (Cisbio62AM4PEJ). Multidrop Combi (Thermo Scientific) was used for assayadditions. An EnVision (PerkinElmer) reader was used to read HTRF.

Cell Culture:

A HEK293T/hD1#1 stable cell line was constructed internally (Pfizer AnnArbor). The cells were grown as adherent cells in NuncT₅₀₀ flasks inhigh glucose DMEM (Invitrogen 11995-065), 10% fetal bovine serumdialyzed (Invitrogen 26400-044), 1×MEM NEAA (Invitrogen 1140, 25 mMHEPES (Invitrogen 15630), 1× Pen/Strep (Invitrogen 15070-063) and 500μg/mL Genenticin (Invitrogen 10131-035) at 37° C. and 5% CO₂. At 72 or96 hours post-growth, cells were rinsed with DPBS, and 0.25%Trypsin-EDTA was added to dislodge the cells. Media was then added andcells were centrifuged and media removed. The cell pellets werere-suspended in Cell Culture Freezing Medium (Invitrogen 12648-056) at adensity of 4e7 cells/mL. One mL aliquots of the cells were made inCryo-vials and frozen at −80° C. for future use in the D1 HTRF assay.

D1 cAMP HTRF Assay Procedure:

Frozen cells were quickly thawed, re-suspended in 50 mL warm media andallowed to sit for 5 min prior to centrifugation (1000 rpm) at roomtemperature. Media was removed and cell pellet was re-suspended inPBS/0.5 μM IBMX generating 2e5 cells/mL. Using a Multidrop Combi, 5 μLcells/well was added to the assay plate (Greiner 784085), which alreadycontained 5 μL of a test compound. Compound controls [5 μM dopamine(final) and 0.5% DMSO (final)] were also included on every plate fordata analysis. Cells and compounds were incubated at room temperaturefor 30 min. Working solutions of cAMP-D2 and anti-cAMP-cryptate wereprepared according to Cisbio instructions. Using Multidrop, 5 μL cAMP-D2working solution was added to the assay plate containing the testcompound and cells. Using Multidrop, 5 μL anti-cAMP-cryptate workingsolutions was added to assay plate containing test compound, cells andcAMP-D2. The assay plate was incubated for 1 hour at room temperature.The assay plate was read on an EnVision plate reader using Cisbiorecommended settings. A cAMP standard curve was generated using cAMPstock solution provided in the Cisbio kit.

Data Analysis:

Data analysis was done using computer software. Percent effects werecalculated from the compound controls. Ratio EC₅₀ was determined usingthe raw ratio data from the EnVision reader. The cAMP standard curve wasused in an analysis program to determine cAMP concentrations from rawratio data. cAMP EC₅₀ was determined using the calculated cAMP data.

TABLE 4 Biological Data for Examples 1-47 Human D1 Human D1 ReceptorcAMP Binding, K_(i) HTRF, EC₅₀ (μM); (μM); Geometric Geometric Examplemean of 2-3 mean of 2-6 Number Compound IUPAC Name determinationsdeterminations 1 4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-fluorophenoxy]-1H-0.0303^(c) 0.176^(a) pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine 24-[4-(1,4-dimethyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]- 0.0348^(b) 0.3551H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine 3(+)-4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3- 0.00976 0.0151c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one 4(−)-4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3- 0.0104 0.0105c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one 54-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H- 0.0130^(c)0.146^(a) pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine 64-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H- 0.113^(c)0.568^(a) pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine 74,6-dimethyl-5-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4- 0.00412 0.0192^(a)yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one 8(−)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3- 0.00183 <0.00222^(a)c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione 94,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4- 0.004870.00733^(a) yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one, ENT-1 104,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4- 0.00504 0.00431yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one, ENT-2 114-[4-(3,5-dimethylpyridazin-4-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H- 0.0141^(b) 0.117pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine, ENT-1 124-[4-(3,5-dimethylpyridazin-4-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H- 0.0883^(b) 0.520pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine, ENT-2 134-[4-(4,6-dimethyl-1-oxidopyrimidin-5-yl)-3- 0.0931^(b) 0.260methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine 146-methyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4- 0.00798^(c) 0.137yloxy)phenyl]imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine 155-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4- 0.0975 0.417yloxy)phenyl]imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine 165-[2-fluoro-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]-6- 0.0283 0.396methylpyrimidine-4-carbonitrile 176-methyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4- 0.0392 0.374yloxy)phenyl]pyrimidine-4-carbonitrile 185-[2-fluoro-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]-6- 0.0294^(c)0.141 methylimidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine 196-methyl-5-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4- 0.0159 0.464^(a)yloxy)phenyl]imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine 204-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)phenoxy]-1H- 0.0443 0.238pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine 212-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-5-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2- 0.102 0.247c]pyridin-4-yloxy)benzonitrile 224-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-2,5-difluorophenoxy]- 0.0548 0.5381H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine 234-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-2,3-difluorophenoxy]- 0.0538^(c)0.590^(a) 1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine 244-[3-chloro-4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)phenoxy]-1H- 0.00984 0.102pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine 25 4-{3-fluoro-4-[4-(3-fluoroazetidin-1-yl)-6-0.00509 0.156 methylpyrimidin-5-yl]phenoxy}-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine 26(−)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin- 0.00456 0.07304-yloxy)phenyl]pyrazin-2(1H)-one 27(+)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin- 0.0106 0.06464-yloxy)phenyl]pyrazin-2(1H)-one 284-methyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4- 0.0357 0.0549yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one 296-methyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4- 0.0679^(b) 0.119yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one 304-[3-methyl-4-(2-methyl-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridin-1- 0.268^(b) 2.76yl)phenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine 316-methyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4- 0.287^(b) 0.548yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one 324-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-fluorophenoxy]-1H- 0.0723^(b)0.903^(a) pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine 334-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methoxyphenoxy]- 0.124^(b) 2.08^(a)1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine 342-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-5-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3- 0.391^(b) 2.38c]pyridin-4-yloxy)benzonitrile 355-[2-fluoro-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]- 0.0696^(b)1.34 6-methylpyrimidine-4-carbonitrile 364-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-2-fluoro-5- 0.118^(b) 0.733methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine 374-[3-chloro-4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)phenoxy]-1H- 0.0523 0.248^(a)pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine 38 4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)phenoxy]-1H-0.129^(b) 2.52^(a) pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine 39(−)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3- 0.0418^(c) 0.168^(a)c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrazin-2(1H)-one 40(+)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3- 0.0281^(b) 0.674c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrazin-2(1H)-one 414,6-dimethyl-5-[4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4- 0.0409^(c) 0.127^(a)yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one 424-methyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4- 0.123 0.340yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one, trifluoroacetate salt 431,5-dimethyl-6-[4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4- 0.0175 0.0282yloxy)phenyl]pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione 444-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H- 0.004600.0553^(a) pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-3-carbonitrile 454,6-dimethyl-5-{4-[(3-methyl-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin- 0.01030.0663^(a) 4-yl)oxy]phenyl}pyridazin-3(2H)-one 464,6-dimethyl-5-{4-[(6-methyl-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin- 0.0247 0.08914-yl)oxy]phenyl}pyridazin-3(2H)-one 475-{4-[(7-methoxy-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4- 0.695^(b) 1.30yl)oxy]phenyl}-4,6-dimethylpyridazin-3(2H)-one ^(a)Value represents thegeometric mean of ≧7 determinations. ^(b)Value represents a singledetermination. ^(c)Value represents the geometric mean of ≧4determinations.

Various modifications of the invention, in addition to those describedherein, will be apparent to those skilled in the art from the foregoingdescription. Such modifications are also intended to fall within thescope of the appendant claims. Each reference (including all patents,patent applications, journal articles, books, and any otherpublications) cited in the present application is hereby incorporated byreference in its entirety.

1-10. (canceled)
 11. A method for treating a disorder in a mammal whichmethod comprises administering to said mammal a therapeuticallyeffective amount of a compound of Formula I:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein: each of T¹, T²,T³, and T⁴ is independently selected from the group consisting of H,halogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, cyclopropyl,fluorocyclopropyyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, and —C(═O)—O—(C₁₋₄alkyl); X¹ is N or CH; each of R¹ and R² is independently selected fromthe group consisting of H, halogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl,C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, and C₃₋₄ cycloalkyl; each of R³ and R⁴ isindependently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, —OH,—CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, C₃₋₄ cycloalkyl, a 4-to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), and —OR⁸; each of R⁵ and R⁶independently is H or selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkyl,C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, and C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl; or R⁵ and R⁶ together with the Natom to which they are attached form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkylor a 5-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3substituents each independently selected from the group consisting ofhalogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl,and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy; R⁸ is selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄alkyl, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, phenyl, anda 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, or3 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting ofhalogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy,and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy; Q′ is a moiety of

(“Moiety M”); Q¹ or ring Q^(1a) is an optionally substituted pyridinyl,pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, or pyrazinyl;

represents a single bond or double bond; Z¹ is C; Z² is C or N; R⁹ isC₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, —CN, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆ haloalkoxy, or C₃₋₇ cycloalkoxy, wherein each of the C₁₋₄alkyl and C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, or5 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting ofhalogen, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy; each R¹⁰ is independently selected from thegroup consisting of halogen, —OH, —CN, —NO₂, oxo, thiono, C₁₋₆ alkyl,C₁₋₆ haloalkyl, C₁₋₆ hydroxylalkyl, C₁₋₆ alkoxy, C₁₋₆ haloalkoxy, C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl, C₂₋₆ alkynyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl, a 4- to 10-memberedheterocycloalkyl, a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, (C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄alkyl-, (4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (C₆₋₁₀aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (5- to 10-membered heteroaryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (5- to10-membered heteroaryl)-C₂₋₄ alkenyl-, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), —N(R⁷)(C(═O)R),—S(═O)₂N(R⁵)(R⁶), —C(═O)—N(R⁵)(R⁶), —C(═O)—R⁸, —C(═O)—OR⁸, and —OR⁸,wherein each of said C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl, 4- to10-membered heterocycloalkyl, 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, (C₃₋₇cycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄alkyl-, (C₆₋₁₀ aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (5- to 10-membered heteroaryl)-C₁₋₄alkyl-, and (5- to 10-membered heteroaryl)-C₂₋₄ alkenyl- is optionallysubstituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selectedfrom the group consisting of halogen, OH, —CN, —NO₂, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄hydroxylalkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), —S—(C₁₋₄ alkyl), —S(═O)—(C₁₋₄alkyl), C₆₋₁₀ aryloxy, (C₆₋₁₀ aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyloxy- optionallysubstituted with 1 or 2 C₁₋₄ alkyl, oxo, —C(═O)H, —C(═O)—C₁₋₄ alkyl,—C(═O)O—C₁₋₄ alkyl, —C(═O)NH₂, —NHC(═O)H, —NHC(═O)—(C₁₋₄ alkyl), C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, and C₁₋₄haloalkoxy; or R⁹ and the adjacent R¹⁰ together with the two ring atomson ring Q^(1a) to which they are attached form a fused benzene ring or afused 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1,2, 3, 4, or 5 independently selected R^(10a); each R^(10a) isindependently selected from the group consisting of halogen, —OH,—C(═O)OH, —C(═O)—C₁₋₄ alkyl, —C(═O)—NH₂, —C(═O)—N(C₁₋₄ alkyl)₂, —CN,C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄ hydroxylalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, and C₁₋₄haloalkoxy; and m is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4, and wherein said disorder isselected from the group consisting of a psychotic disorder,schizophrenia, schizoaffective disorder, cognitive impairment, andParkinson's disease.
 12. A method for treating a disorder in a mammalwhich method comprises administering to said mammal a therapeuticallyeffective amount of a compound of Formula I:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein: each of T¹, T²,T³, and T⁴ is independently selected from the group consisting of H,halogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, cyclopropyl,fluorocyclopropyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, and —C(═O)—O—(C₁₋₄alkyl); X¹ is N or CH; each of R¹ and R² is independently selected fromthe group consisting of H, halogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl,C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, and C₃₋₄ cycloalkyl; each of R³ and R⁴ isindependently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, —OH,—CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, C₃₋₄ cycloalkyl, a 4-to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), and —OR⁸; each of R⁵ and R⁶independently is H or selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkyl,C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, and C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl; or R⁵ and R⁶ together with the Natom to which they are attached form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkylor a 5-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3substituents each independently selected from the group consisting ofhalogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl,and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy; R⁸ is selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄alkyl, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, phenyl, anda 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, or3 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting ofhalogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy,and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy; Q is a moiety of

(“Moiety M”);

represents a single bond or double bond; Z¹ is C; Z² is C or N; MoietyM¹ is selected from the group consisting of quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl,1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridinyl, imidazo[1,2-a]pyridinyl,1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridinyl, imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazinyl,imidazo[2,1-c][1,2,4]triazinyl, imidazo[1,5-a]pyrazinyl,imidazo[1,2-a]pyrimidinyl, 1H-indazolyl, 9H-purinyl,imidazo[1,2-a]pyrimidinyl, [1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrimidinyl,isoxazolo[5,4-c]pyridazinyl, isoxazolo[3,4-c]pyridazinyl, and[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-b]pyridazinyl, each optionally substituted with 1,2, or 3 R¹⁰ and further optionally substituted with 1 or 2 R^(10a); orwherein Moiety M¹ is selected from the group consisting of pyrimidinyl,pyrazinyl, pyridinyl, pyridazinyl, 1H-pyrazolyl, 1H-pyrrolyl,4H-pyrazolyl, 3-oxo-2H-pyridazinyl, 1H-2-oxo-pyrimidinyl,1H-2-oxo-pyridinyl, 2,4(1H,3H)-dioxo-pyrimidinyl, and1H-2-oxo-pyrazinyl, each substituted with R⁹ and further optionallysubstituted with 1, 2, or 3 R¹⁰; R⁹ is C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —CN, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), C₁₋₆ alkoxy, C₁₋₆ haloalkoxy, or C₃₋₇cycloalkoxy, wherein each of the C₁₋₄ alkyl and C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl isoptionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents eachindependently selected from the group consisting of halogen, —N(R⁵)(R⁶),C1 alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, and C₁₋₄haloalkoxy; each R¹⁰ is independently selected from the group consistingof halogen, —OH, —CN, —NO₂, oxo, thiono, C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆ haloalkyl,C₁₋₆ hydroxylalkyl, C₁₋₆ alkoxy, C₁₋₆ haloalkoxy, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆ alkynyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl, a 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl,a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, (C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (4- to10-membered heterocycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (C₆₋₁₀ aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (5-to 10-membered heteroaryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (5- to 10-memberedheteroaryl)-C₂₋₄ alkenyl-, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), —N(R⁷)(C(═O)R), —S(═O)₂N(R⁵)(R⁶),—C(═O)—N(R⁵)(R⁶), —C(═O)—R⁸, —C(═O)—OR⁸, and —OR⁸, wherein each of saidC₁₋₆ alkyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl, 4- to 10-memberedheterocycloalkyl, 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, (C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄alkyl-, (4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (C₆₋₁₀aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (5- to 10-membered heteroaryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, and (5-to 10-membered heteroaryl)-C₂₋₄ alkenyl- is optionally substituted with1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from the groupconsisting of halogen, OH, —CN, —NO₂, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ hydroxylalkyl,C₁₋₄ alkoxy, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), —S—(C₁₋₄ alkyl), —S(═O)—(C₁₋₄ alkyl), C₆₋₁₀aryloxy, (C₆₋₁₀ aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyloxy- optionally substituted with 1 or 2C₁₋₄ alkyl, oxo, —C(═O)H, —C(═O)—C₁₋₄ alkyl, —C(═O)O—C₁₋₄ alkyl,—C(═O)NH₂, —NHC(═O)H, —NHC(═O)—(C₁₋₄ alkyl), C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, a 5- or6-membered heteroaryl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy; or R⁹ andthe adjacent R¹⁰ together with the two ring atoms on ring Q^(1a) towhich they are attached form a fused benzene ring or a fused 5- or6-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5independently selected R^(10a); each R^(10a) is independently selectedfrom the group consisting of halogen, —OH, —C(═O)OH, —C(═O)—C₁₋₄ alkyl,—C(═O)—NH₂, —C(═O)—N(C₁₋₄ alkyl)₂, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄hydroxylalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy; and m is 0, 1, 2, 3,or 4, and wherein said disorder is selected from the group consisting ofa psychotic disorder, schizophrenia, schizoaffective disorder, cognitiveimpairment, and Parkinson's disease.
 13. A method for treating adisorder in a mammal which method comprises administering to said mammala therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein: each of T¹, T²,T³, and T⁴ is independently selected from the group consisting of H,halogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, cyclopropyl,fluorocyclopropyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, and —C(═O)—O—(C₁₋₄alkyl); X¹ is N or CH; each of R¹ and R² is independently selected fromthe group consisting of H, halogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl,C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, and C₃₋₄ cycloalkyl; each of R³ and R⁴ isindependently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, —OH,—CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, C₃₋₄ cycloalkyl, a 4-to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), and —OR⁸; each of R⁵ and R⁶independently is H or selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkyl,C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, and C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl; or R⁵ and R⁶ together with the Natom to which they are attached form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkylor a 5-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3substituents each independently selected from the group consisting ofhalogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl,and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy; R⁸ is selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄alkyl, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, phenyl, anda 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, or3 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting ofhalogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy,and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy; Q¹ is a moiety of

(“Moiety M”); Moiety M¹ is

R⁹ is C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, —CN, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆ haloalkoxy, or C₃₋₇ cycloalkoxy, wherein each of the C₁₋₄alkyl and C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, or5 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting ofhalogen, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy; each R¹⁰ is independently selected from thegroup consisting of halogen, —OH, —CN, —NO₂, oxo, thiono, C₁₋₆ alkyl,C₁₋₆ haloalkyl, C₁₋₆ hydroxylalkyl, C₁₋₆ alkoxy, C₁₋₆ haloalkoxy, C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl, C₂₋₆ alkynyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl, a 4- to 10-memberedheterocycloalkyl, a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, (C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄alkyl-, (4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (C₆₋₁₀aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (5- to 10-membered heteroaryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (5- to10-membered heteroaryl)-C₂₋₄ alkenyl-, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), —N(R⁷)(C(═O)R⁸),—S(═O)₂N(R⁵)(R⁶), —C(═O)—N(R⁵)(R⁶), —C(═O)—R⁸, —C(═O)—OR⁸, and —OR⁸,wherein each of said C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl, 4- to10-membered heterocycloalkyl, 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, (C₃₋₇cycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄alkyl-, (C₆₋₁₀ aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (5- to 10-membered heteroaryl)-C₁₋₄alkyl-, and (5- to 10-membered heteroaryl)-C₂₋₄ alkenyl- is optionallysubstituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selectedfrom the group consisting of halogen, OH, —CN, —NO₂, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄hydroxylalkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), —S—(C₁₋₄ alkyl), —S(═O)—(C₁₋₄alkyl), C₆₋₁₀ aryloxy, (C₆₋₁₀ aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyloxy- optionallysubstituted with 1 or 2 C₁₋₄ alkyl, oxo, —C(═O)H, —C(═O)—C₁₋₄ alkyl,—C(═O)O—C₁₋₄ alkyl, —C(═O)NH₂, —NHC(═O)H, —NHC(═O)—(C₁₋₄ alkyl), C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, and C₁₋₄haloalkoxy; m is 0, 1, or 2; R^(10a) is C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, orC₃₋₇ cycloalkyl; and t is 0 or 1, and wherein said disorder is selectedfrom the group consisting of a psychotic disorder, schizophrenia,schizoaffective disorder, cognitive impairment, and Parkinson's disease.14. A method for treating a disorder in a mammal which method comprisesadministering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of acompound of Formula I:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein: each of T¹, T²,T³, and T⁴ is independently selected from the group consisting of H,halogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, cyclopropyl,fluorocyclopropyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, and —C(═O)—O—(C₁₋₄alkyl); X¹ is N or CH; each of R¹ and R² is independently selected fromthe group consisting of H, halogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl,C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, and C₃₋₄ cycloalkyl; each of R³ and R⁴ isindependently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, —OH,—CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, C₃₋₄ cycloalkyl, a 4-to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), and —OR⁸; each of R⁵ and R⁶independently is H or selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkyl,C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, and C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl; or R⁵ and R⁶ together with the Natom to which they are attached form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkylor a 5-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3substituents each independently selected from the group consisting ofhalogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl,and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy; R⁸ is selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄alkyl, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, phenyl, anda 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, or3 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting ofhalogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy,and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy; Q¹ is a moiety of

(“Moiety M¹”); Moiety M¹ is

R⁹ is C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, —CN, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆ haloalkoxy, or C₃₋₇ cycloalkoxy, wherein each of the C₁₋₄alkyl and C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, or5 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting ofhalogen, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆ haloalkyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, and C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy; each R¹⁰ is independently selected from thegroup consisting of halogen, —OH, —CN, —NO₂, oxo, thiono, C₁₋₆ alkyl,C₁₋₆ haloalkyl, C₁₋₆ hydroxylalkyl, C₁₋₆ alkoxy, C₁₋₆ haloalkoxy, C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl, C₂₋₆ alkynyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl, a 4- to 10-memberedheterocycloalkyl, a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, (C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄alkyl-, (4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (C₆₋₁₀aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (5- to 10-membered heteroaryl)-C₄ alkyl-, (5- to10-membered heteroaryl)-C₂₋₄ alkenyl-, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), —N(R⁷)(C(═O)R),—S(═O)₂N(R⁵)(R⁶), —C(═O)—N(R⁵)(R⁶), —C(═O)—R⁸, —C(═O)—OR⁸, and —OR⁸,wherein each of said C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, C₆₋₁₀ so aryl, 4- to10-membered heterocycloalkyl, 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, (C₃₋₇cycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl)-C₁₋₄alkyl-, (C₆-10 aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl-, (5- to 10-membered heteroaryl)-C₁₋₄alkyl-, and (5- to 10-membered heteroaryl)-C₂₋₄ alkenyl- is optionallysubstituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selectedfrom the group consisting of halogen, OH, —CN, —NO₂, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄hydroxylalkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, —N(R⁵)(R⁶), —S—(C₁₋₄ alkyl), —S(═O)—(C₁₋₄alkyl), C₆₋₁₀ aryloxy, (C₆₋₁₀ aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyloxy- optionallysubstituted with 1 or 2 C₁₋₄ alkyl, oxo, —C(═O)H, —C(═O)—C₁₋₄ alkyl,—C(═O)O—C₁₋₄ alkyl, —C(═O)NH₂, —NHC(═O)H, —NHC(═O)—(C₁₋₄ alkyl), C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, and C₁₋₄haloalkoxy; and R¹¹ is H, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, or C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, and wherein said disorder is selected from the groupconsisting of a psychotic disorder, schizophrenia, schizoaffectivedisorder, cognitive impairment, and Parkinson's disease.
 15. The methodof claim 13 wherein R⁹ is C₁₋₄ alkyl or —CN; and each R¹⁰ isindependently C₁₋₄ alkyl.
 16. A method for treating a disorder in ahuman which method comprises administering to said human atherapeutically effective amount of a compound selected from:4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-fluorophenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine;(+)-4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one;(−)-4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one;4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine;4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine;4,6-dimethyl-5-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one;(−)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione;4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one,ENT-1;4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one,ENT-2;4-[4-(4,6-dimethyl-1-oxidopyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine;6-methyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine;4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)phenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine;2-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-5-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)benzonitrile;4-[3-chloro-4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)phenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine;(−)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrazin-2(1H)-one;4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-fluorophenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine;4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methoxyphenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine;4-[3-chloro-4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)phenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine;(+)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrazin-2(1H)-one;4,6-dimethyl-5-[4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one;and1,5-dimethyl-6-[4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione,or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and wherein said disorderis selected from the group consisting of a psychotic disorder,schizophrenia, schizoaffective disorder, cognitive impairment, andParkinson's disease. 17-19. (canceled)
 20. The method of claim 11,wherein said disorder is cognitive impairment.
 21. The method of claim11, wherein said disorder is Parkinson's disease.
 22. The method ofclaim 12, wherein said disorder is cognitive impairment.
 23. The methodof claim 12, wherein said disorder is Parkinson's disease.
 24. Themethod of claim 13, wherein said disorder is cognitive impairment. 25.The method of claim 13, wherein said disorder is Parkinson's disease.26. The method of claim 14, wherein said disorder is cognitiveimpairment.
 27. The method of claim 14, wherein said disorder isParkinson's disease.
 28. The method of claim 15, wherein said disorderis cognitive impairment.
 29. The method of claim 15, wherein saiddisorder is Parkinson's disease.
 30. The method of claim 16, whereinsaid disorder is cognitive impairment.
 31. The method of claim 16,wherein said disorder is Parkinson's disease.
 32. The method of claim 30wherein the compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to beadministered is4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-fluorophenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridineor a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 33. The method of claim30 wherein the compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof tobe administered is4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-fluorophenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine.34. The method of claim 30 wherein the compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof to be administered is a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt of4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-fluorophenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine.35. The method of claim 31 wherein the compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof to be administered is4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-fluorophenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridineor a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 36. The method of claim31 wherein the compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof tobe administered is4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-fluorophenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine.37. The method of claim 31 wherein the compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof to be administered is a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt of4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-fluorophenoxy]-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine.38. The method of claim 30 wherein the compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof to be administered is4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridineor a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 39. The method of claim30 wherein the compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof tobe administered is4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine.40. The method of claim 30 wherein the compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof to be administered is a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt of4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine.41. The method of claim 31 wherein the compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof to be administered is4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridineor a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 42. The method of claim31 wherein the compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof tobe administered is4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine.43. The method of claim 31 wherein the compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof to be administered is a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt of4-[4-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-3-methylphenoxy]-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine.44. The method of claim 30 wherein the compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof to be administered is(−)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dioneor a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 45. The method of claim30 wherein the compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof tobe administered is(−)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione.46. The method of claim 30 wherein the compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof to be administered is a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt of(−)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione.47. The method of claim 31 wherein the compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof to be administered is(−)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dioneor a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 48. The method of claim31 wherein the compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof tobe administered is(−)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione.49. The method of claim 31 wherein the compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof to be administered is a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt of(−)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione.50. The method of claim 30 wherein the compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof to be administered is4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one,ENT-1 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 51. The method ofclaim 30 wherein the compound or pharmaceutically acceptable saltthereof to be administered is4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one,ENT-1.
 52. The method of claim 30 wherein the compound orpharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to be administered is apharmaceutically acceptable salt of4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one,ENT-1.
 53. The method of claim 31 wherein the compound orpharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to be administered is4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one,ENT-1 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 54. The method ofclaim 31 wherein the compound or pharmaceutically acceptable saltthereof to be administered is4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one,ENT-1.
 55. The method of claim 31 wherein the compound orpharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to be administered is apharmaceutically acceptable salt of4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one,ENT-1.
 56. The method of claim 30 wherein the compound orpharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to be administered is4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one,ENT-2 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 57. The method ofclaim 30 wherein the compound or pharmaceutically acceptable saltthereof to be administered is4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one,ENT-2.
 58. The method of claim 30 wherein the compound orpharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to be administered is apharmaceutically acceptable salt of4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one,ENT-2.
 59. The method of claim 31 wherein the compound orpharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to be administered is4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one,ENT-2 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 60. The method ofclaim 31 wherein the compound or pharmaceutically acceptable saltthereof to be administered is4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one,ENT-2.
 61. The method of claim 31 wherein the compound orpharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to be administered is apharmaceutically acceptable salt of4,6-dimethyl-5-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyridazin-3(2H)-one,ENT-2.
 62. The method of claim 30 wherein the compound orpharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to be administered is2-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-5-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)benzonitrileor a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 63. The method of claim30 wherein the compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof tobe administered is2-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-5-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)benzonitrile.64. The method of claim 30 wherein the compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof to be administered is a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt of2-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-5-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)benzonitrile.65. The method of claim 31 wherein the compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof to be administered is2-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-5-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)benzonitrileor a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 66. The method of claim31 wherein the compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof tobe administered is2-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-5-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)benzonitrile.67. The method of claim 31 wherein the compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof to be administered is a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt of2-(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-5-yl)-5-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)benzonitrile.68. The method of claim 30 wherein the compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof to be administered is(+)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrazin-2(1H)-oneor a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 69. The method of claim30 wherein the compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof tobe administered is(+)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrazin-2(1H)-one.70. The method of claim 30 wherein the compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof to be administered is a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt of(+)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrazin-2(1H)-one.71. The method of claim 31 wherein the compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof to be administered is(+)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrazin-2(1H)-oneor a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 72. The method of claim31 wherein the compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof tobe administered is(+)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrazin-2(1H)-one.73. The method of claim 31 wherein the compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof to be administered is a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt of(+)-1,5-dimethyl-6-[2-methyl-4-(1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-4-yloxy)phenyl]pyrazin-2(1H)-one.